100% found this document useful (1 vote)

2K views522 pages

S4M Service Manual

Zebra S4M Service Manual

Uploaded by

Rafał Krzysztof Kowalski

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

100% found this document useful (1 vote)

2K views522 pages

S4M Service Manual

Zebra S4M Service Manual

Uploaded by

Rafał Krzysztof Kowalski

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 522

S4M

Midrange Printer

Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

Copyright and Liability Disclaimer

2011 ZIH Corp. The copyrights in this manual and the software and/or firmware in the printer described
therein are owned by ZIH Corp. and Zebras licensors. Unauthorized reproduction of this manual or the software
and/or firmware in the printer may result in imprisonment of up to one year and fines of up to $10,000
(17 U.S.C.506). Copyright violators may be subject to civil liability.
This product may contain ZPL, ZPL II, and ZebraLink programs; Element Energy Equalizer Circuit; E3;
and Monotype Imaging fonts. Software ZIH Corp. All rights reserved worldwide.
ZebraLink, Element Energy Equalizer, E3 and all product names and numbers are trademarks, and Zebra, the Zebra
head graphic, ZPL and ZPL II are registered trademarks of ZIH Corp. All rights reserved worldwide.
All other brand names, product names, or trademarks belong to their respective holders. For additional trademark
information, please see Trademarks on the product CD.

Proprietary Statement This manual contains proprietary information of Zebra Technologies Corporation and its
subsidiaries (Zebra Technologies). It is intended solely for the information and use of parties operating and
maintaining the equipment described herein. Such proprietary information may not be used, reproduced, or disclosed
to any other parties for any other purpose without the express, written permission of Zebra Technologies Corporation.

Product Improvements Continuous improvement of products is a policy of Zebra Technologies Corporation.

All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.

Liability Disclaimer Zebra Technologies Corporation takes steps to ensure that its published Engineering
specifications and manuals are correct; however, errors do occur. Zebra Technologies Corporation reserves the right
to correct any such errors and disclaims liability resulting therefrom.
Limitation of Liability In no event shall Zebra Technologies Corporation or anyone else involved in the creation,
production, or delivery of the accompanying product (including hardware and software) be liable for any damages
whatsoever (including, without limitation, consequential damages including loss of business profits, business
interruption, or loss of business information) arising out of the use of, the results of use of, or inability to use such
product, even if Zebra Technologies Corporation has been advised of the possibility of such damages. Some
jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation
or exclusion may not apply to you.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Remove the Printhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Install the New Printhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Printhead Upgrade Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Remove the Printhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Install the Printhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Remove the Electronics Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Remove the Main Logic Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Conversion Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Reinstall the MLB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Reinstall the Electronics Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Verify the Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Print Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Remove the Electronics Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Remove the Print Mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Install the New Print Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Adjust the Print Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Complet the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Reinstall the Electronics Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Verify the Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Printhead Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Remove the Electronics Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Remove the Print Mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Remove the Old Printhead Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Install the New Printhead Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Reinstall the Print Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Adjust the Print Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Complete the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Reinstall the Electronics Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Verify the Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Latch Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Remove the Old Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Install the New Latch Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Adjust Print Mechanism with Cam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Adjust the Print Mechanism without Cam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Compltete the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

13291L-006 Rev. A

13291L-006 Rev. A

Table of Contents

Platen Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove the Electronics Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove the Platen Roller Pulley and Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove the Peel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove the Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove the Platen Roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install the New Platen Roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reinstall the Peel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reinstall the Electronics Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pinch Roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove the Pinch Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove the Electronics Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove the Old Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove the Take-Label Sensor Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install the Take-Label Sensor Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install the New Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reinstall the Electronics Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Logic Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove the Electronics Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove the Booster Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove the Old Main Logic Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install the New Main Logic Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reinstall the Electronics Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Logic Board Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove the Electronics Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove the Defective Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reinstall the Electronics Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Real Time Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove the Electronics Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove the RTC Option Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install the RTC Option Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reinstall the Electronics Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set the RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

356
356
356
359
360
361
363
365
367
369
370
370
370
376
376
376
379
380
381
383
384
385
385
385
389
390
392
393
394
394
397
397
398
398
398
401
403
404
406

Control Panel Buttons ..................................................................................32
Control Panel Lights.....................................................................................34
Storage Temperature and Humidity .............................................................38
Operating Temperature and Humidity .........................................................39
Data Communication Interfaces...................................................................42
Types of Media ............................................................................................44
Font Matrix for 8 dot/mm (203 dpi) Printheads...........................................52
Font Matrix for 12 dot/mm (300 dpi) Printheads.........................................53
Operations ............................................................................................. 55
Printhead Pressure ........................................................................................68
Password Levels and Defaults......................................................................71
Right Arrow Used to Reach ADVANCED SETUP Prompt ...........................72
Left Arrow Used to Reach ADVANCED SETUP Prompt..............................72
Printer Parameters, Password Levels 1 and 2 .............................................78
Printer Parameters, Password Level 3..........................................................83
Printer Parameters, Password Level 4..........................................................91
Printer Parameters, Manufacturing Menu ....................................................95
Data Ports ............................................................................................ 103
Serial Connector Pin Configuration ...........................................................104
Parallel Cable Pin Configuration................................................................108
Troubleshooting .................................................................................. 111
LCD Error Messages..................................................................................114
Memory Errors ...........................................................................................118
Print Quality Problems ...............................................................................119
Calibration Problems..................................................................................122
Communications Problems ........................................................................123
5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

List of Tables

Ribbon Problems ........................................................................................124

Miscellaneous Printer Problems.................................................................125
Judging Bar Code Quality ..........................................................................131
Preventive and Corrective Maintenance ........................................... 135
Recommended Cleaning Schedule.............................................................143
Maintenance and Drawings ................................................................ 467
Media Side Main Printer Assemblies.........................................................471
Electronics Side Main Printer Assemblies .................................................473
Print Mechanism/Printhead Assembly .......................................................475
Printhead Maintenance Kit.........................................................................476
Printhead Cable Maintenance Kit ..............................................................477
Platen Drive System ...................................................................................479
Latch Assembly Maintenance Kit ..............................................................480
Platen Roller Maintenance Kit ...................................................................481
(Reflective) Media Sensor Assembly Maintenance Kit.............................482
Ribbon/Printhead Open Sensor Assembly Maintenance Kit .....................483
Transmissive Sensor Assembly Maintenance Kit......................................484
Dancer Assembly Maintenance Kit............................................................485
Ribbon Supply Spindle Maintenance Kit...................................................486
Static Brush Maintenance Kit ....................................................................487
Ribbon Take-up Spindle Maintenance Kit.................................................488
Media Hanger Maintenance Kit .................................................................489
Media Door Maintenance Kit.....................................................................490
Peel Option Kit...........................................................................................491
Peel Assembly Maintenance Kit ................................................................492
Pinch Roller Maintenance Kit ....................................................................493
Electronics Cover Maintenance Kit ...........................................................494
Control Panel and Take-Label Maintenance Kits ......................................495
Stepper Motor Maintenance Kit.................................................................496
Main Logic Board Maintenance Kit...........................................................497
Real Time Clock (RTC) Maintenance/Option Kit .....................................498
Booster Board Maintenance Kit.................................................................499
Power Supply Maintenance Kit..................................................................500
Ribbon Take-up Spindle Clutch Maintenance Kit .....................................501
Gears and Pulley Maintenance Kit.............................................................502
Communication Options ............................................................................504
Cutter Option/Maintenance Kit..................................................................505
Hardware View 1 (Media Compartment)...................................................506
Hardware View 2 (Printer Rear) ................................................................507
Hardware View 3 (Printer Front) ...............................................................508
Hardware View 4 (Electronics Side)..........................................................510

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

About This Document

This section provides you with contact information, document structure and organization, and
additional reference documents.

Contents
Who Should Use This Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How This Document Is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Document Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

26
26
27
28

13291L-006 Rev. A

About This Document

Who Should Use This Document

This Maintenance Manual is intended for use by system technicians and repair personnel.

How This Document Is Organized

The Maintenance Manual is set up as follows:

13291L-006 Rev. A

Section

Description

System Description on page 29

This section provides an overview of the printer.

Included are specifications of the printer and a
brief explanation of each component and its
function.

Operations on page 55

This section assists the technician with out of the

box installation, initial setup, and printer
operation.

Troubleshooting on page 111

This section provides information about LCD,

print quality, communications, and other errors
that you might need to troubleshoot. The tables
provide symptoms, diagnoses of probable causes,
and recommended actions that should result in
proper printer operation. Working with these
tables, the technician can diagnose printer faults
and determine the needed repair.

Preventive and Corrective

Maintenance on page 135

This section provides various levels of printer

maintenance required for optimum performance.
This section also provides information on cleaning
and general maintenance, replacement of major
assemblies, and mechanical adjustments.

Maintenance and Drawings

on page 467

This section illustrates parts and assemblies

common to the S4M and gives their maintenance
part numbers.

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

About This Document

Contacts

Contacts
Technical Support via the Internet is available 24 hours per day, 365 days per year.
Web Site: www.zebra.com
E-mail Back Technical Library:
E-mail address: [email protected]
Subject line: Emaillist
Self Service Knowledge Base: www.zebra.com/knowledgebase
Online Case Registration: www.zebra.com/techrequest
Which Department
Do You Need?
Regional Headquarters

The Americas
Zebra Technologies Corporation
475 Half Day Road, Suite 500
Lincolnshire, IL 60069 USA
T: +1 847 634 6700
Toll-free +1 866 230 9494
F: +1 847 913 8766

Europe, Middle East,

and Africa
Zebra Technologies Europe
Limited
Dukes Meadow
Millboard Road
Bourne End
Buckinghamshire, SL8 5XF
United Kingdom

Asia Pacific
and India
Zebra Technologies Asia Pacific
Pte. Ltd.
120 Robinson Road
#06-01 Parakou Building
Singapore 068913
T: + 65 6858 0722
F: +65 6885 0838

T: +44 (0) 1628 556000

F: +44 (0) 1628 556001
Technical Support
For questions on the
operation of Zebra
equipment and software,
please call your distributor.
For additional assistance,
contact us.

T: +1 877 ASK ZEBRA (275 9327)

F: +1 847 913 2578

T: +44 (0) 1628 556039

F: +44 (0) 1628 556003

T: +65 6858 0722

F: +65 6885 0838

Hardware: [email protected]
Software: [email protected]

E: [email protected]

E: China: [email protected]
All other areas:
[email protected]

T: +1 877 ASK ZEBRA (275 9327)

Please have your model and

serial numbers available.
Repair Service
Department
For back-to-base service
and repair.
Technical Training
Department
For Zebra product training
courses.

To request a repair in the U.S.,

go to www.zebra.com/repair.
T: +1 847 793 6868
T: +1 847 793 6864
F: +1 847 913 2578
E: [email protected]

Inquiry Department

T: +1 877 ASK ZEBRA (275 9327)

For product literature and

distributor and dealer
information.

E: [email protected]

Customer Service
Department (US)

T: +1 877 ASK ZEBRA (275 9327)

Internal Sales
Department (UK)

E: [email protected]

For printers, parts, media,

and ribbon, please call your
distributor or contact us.
Key:

5/4/11

T: Telephone
F: Facsimile
E: E-mail

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

About This Document

Document Conventions

Document Conventions
The following conventions are used throughout this document to convey certain information.
Alternate Color (online only) Cross-references contain hot links to other sections in this
guide. If you are viewing this guide online in.pdf format, you can click the cross-reference
(blue text) to jump directly to its location.
LCD Display Examples Text from a printers Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) appears in

Bubbledot ICG font.

Command Line Examples Command line examples appear in Courier New font. For
example, type ZTools to get to the Post-Install scripts in the bin directory.
Files and Directories File names and directories appear in Courier New font. For
example, the Zebra<version number>.tar file and the /root directory.
Icons Used
Caution Warns you of the potential for electrostatic discharge.

Caution Warns you of a potential electric shock situation.

Caution Warns you of a situation where excessive heat could cause a burn.

Caution Advises you that failure to take or avoid a specific action could result in physical
harm to you.

Caution (No icon) Advises you that failure to take or avoid a specific action could result in
physical harm to the hardware.

Important Advises you of information that is essential to complete a task.

FEED
PAUSE

7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

5/4/11

ALERT light
POWER light
LCD
ENTER button
MENU button
Up arrow button
CANCEL or Left Arrow button
FEED or Right Arrow button
PAUSE or Down Arrow button

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

System Description
Control Panel

Control Panel LCD

The control panel LCD functions differently in different printer modes.
In Operating mode, the LCD displays the printers status, sometimes in conjunction with
a control panel light (see Control Panel Lights on page 34). When the printer is receiving
data, the control panel shows the word DATA and cycles through a series of dots and
spaces.
In Pause mode, the printer stops printing temporarily.
In Setup mode, you can use the control panel LCD to view or modify printer parameters
(see Control Panel Parameters on page 78).
In Error mode, the LCD may display an alert or error message (see LCD Error Messages
on page 114).

Control Panel Buttons

The printer has six basic control buttons on the control panel. Some of these buttons also
function as navigational keys when the printer is in Setup mode. The current function of a
particular button is determined by which light is illuminated next to it (Figure 3).
Figure 3 Example of Active Control Panel Buttons
1

FEED

1
2

FEED active
Right arrow active

Table 1 describes the function of each button. The MENU, PAUSE, and FEED buttons are
active when the printer is in normal operating mode.
Table 1 Control Panel Buttons
Button
MENU

Appearance
MENU

ENTER

CANCEL

Function/Description

Enters and exits Setup mode.

If a parameter or option in Setup mode needs to be selected, pressing

ENTER selects the item. This button is active only when necessary.
CANCEL functions only in Pause mode. Pressing CANCEL once has these

effects:
Cancels the label format that is currently printing.
If no label format is printing, the next one to be printed is canceled.
If no label formats are waiting to be printed, CANCEL is ignored.
To clear the printers entire label format memory, press and hold
CANCEL.
13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

System Description
Control Panel

Table 1 Control Panel Buttons (Continued)

Button

Appearance

FEED

PAUSE

Function/Description

Advances a blank label.

If the printer is idle or paused, the label is fed immediately.
If the printer is printing, the label is fed after printing finishes.
Stops and restarts the printing process or removes error messages and
clears the LCD. When the printer is paused, the PAUSE light blinks.
If the printer is idle, it enters Pause mode immediately.
If the printer is printing, the label is completed before the printer
pauses.

Left Arrow

When in Setup mode, scrolls the LCD to the previous parameter.

Right Arrow

When in Setup mode, scrolls the LCD to the next parameter.

Up Arrow

When in Setup mode, increases values or scrolls to the next option.

Down Arrow

When in Setup mode, decreases values or scrolls to the previous option.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

System Description
Control Panel

Control Panel Lights

Table 2 describes lights on the control panel that indicate different printer conditions.
Table 2 Control Panel Lights
Light

POWER
ALERT
PAUSE (part of the

Appearance
POWER
ALERT

CANCEL (part of
the CANCEL button)

13291L-006 Rev. A

Indicates that the printer is on.

In an error or alert situation, the ALERT light flashes.

PAUSE

Flashes when the printer is in Pause mode unless the printer enters
Setup mode and the down arrow becomes active.

FEED

On during normal printer operation, indicating that the printer can

feed a blank label.

PAUSE button)

FEED (part of the

FEED button)

Function/Description

CANCEL

On when canceling a label format is a valid option.

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

System Description
Printer Media Compartment

Printer Media Compartment

Figure 4 shows a simplified view of the media compartment of your printer. Depending on
installed options, your printer may look slightly different.
Figure 4 Media Compartment

2
6
1

11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Printhead assembly
Ribbon supply spindle*
Ribbon take-up spindle*
Media supply hanger
Media supply guide
Fanfold media slot
Dancer assembly
Media guide
Printhead release latch
Peel release lever**
Peel assembly**

* Present only on printers that have the Thermal Transfer option installed.
** Present only on printers that have the Peel option installed.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

System Description
Printer Language Modes

Printer Language Modes

Depending on how your printer was ordered, it came from the factory with firmware that
operates in or allows you to use certain commands for one of the following printer languages:
Zebra Programming Language (ZPL)
Eltron Programming Language (EPL)
Datamax Programming Language (APL-D)
Intermec Printer Language (APL-I)

Firmware Downloads
You may download S4M firmware to the printer at any time to change from one printer
language to another. For the latest firmware versions and instructions for downloading them,
go to http://www.zebra.com/firmware.
Note When the printer changes from one printer language to another, error messages may

appear on the LCD, and some control panel lights may activate in error mode. You may
ignore these error messages and lights. When the firmware download is complete, reboot the
printer and load printer defaults to return the printer to Operating mode.

Additional Printer Language Information

The following manuals contain specific information about the different printer language
modes. Copies of these manuals are on the CD that came with your printer and at
http://www.zebra.com/manuals.
ZPL II Programming Guide
EPL2 Programming Guide
APL-D Reference Guide
APL-I Reference Guide

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

System Description
Before You Begin

Before You Begin

Review this checklist, and resolve any issues before you set up or use your printer.
Unpack and Inspect the Printer Have you unpacked the printer and inspected it for
damage? If you have not, see Unpack and Inspect the Printer on page 38.
Select a Site Have you selected an appropriate location for the printer? If you have not,
see Select a Site for the Printer on page 39.
Connect to a Data Source Have you determined how the printer will connect to a
data source (usually a computer)? For more information, see Select a Data
Communication Interface on page 42.
Attach a Power Cord Do you have the correct power cord for your printer? If you are
unsure, see Power Cord Specifications on page 41. To attach the power cord and connect
the printer to a power source, see Connect the Printer to a Power Source on page 40.
Select Media Do you have the correct media for your application? If you are unsure,
see Types of Media on page 44.
Select Ribbon Do you need to use ribbon, and is the appropriate ribbon available, if
needed? If you are unsure, see Ribbon Overview on page 45.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

System Description
Handling the Printer

Handling the Printer

This section describes how to handle your printer.

Unpack and Inspect the Printer

When you receive the printer, immediately unpack it and inspect for shipping damage.
Save all packing materials.
Check all exterior surfaces for damage.
Raise the media door, and inspect the media compartment for damage to components.
If you discover shipping damage upon inspection:
Immediately notify the shipping company and file a damage report.
Keep all packaging material for shipping company inspection.
Important Zebra Technologies Corporation is not responsible for any damage incurred
during the shipment of the equipment and will not repair this damage under warranty.

Store the Printer

If you are not placing the printer into immediate operation, repackage it using the original
packing materials. You may store the printer under the conditions shown in Table 3.
Table 3 Storage Temperature and Humidity
Temperature

Relative Humidity

40F to 140F (40 to 60C)

5% to 85% non-condensing

Ship the Printer

If you must ship the printer:
Turn off (O) the printer, and disconnect all cables.
Close the printhead.
Carefully pack the printer into the original container or a suitable alternate container to
avoid damage during transit. A shipping container can be purchased from Zebra if the
original packaging has been lost or destroyed.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

System Description
Select a Site for the Printer

Select a Site for the Printer

Consider the following when selecting an appropriate location for your printer.

Select a Surface
Select a solid, level surface of sufficient size and strength to accommodate the printer and
other equipment (such as a computer), if necessary. The choices include a table, countertop,
desk, or cart. For the printers weight and dimensions, see General Specifications on page 46.

Provide Proper Operating Conditions

This printer is designed to function in a wide range of environmental and electrical conditions,
including a warehouse or factory floor. For more information on the required conditions, see
General Specifications on page 46.
Table 4 shows the temperature and relative humidity requirements for the printer when it is
operating.
Table 4 Operating Temperature and Humidity
Mode

Temperature

Relative Humidity

Thermal Transfer

40 to 105F (5 to 40C)

20 to 85% non-condensing.

Direct Thermal

32 to 105F (0 to 40C)

20 to 85% non-condensing

Allow Proper Space

The printer should have enough space around it for you to be able to open the media door. To
allow for proper ventilation and cooling, leave open space on all sides of the printer.
Caution Do not place any padding or cushioning material behind or under the printer
because this restricts air flow and could cause the printer to overheat.

Provide a Data Source

If the printer will be located away from the data source (such as a computer), the selected site
must provide the appropriate connections to that data source. For more information on the
types of communication interfaces and their limitations, see Select a Data Communication
Interface on page 42.

Provide a Power Source

Place the printer within a short distance of a power outlet that is easily accessible.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

System Description
Connect the Printer to a Power Source

Connect the Printer to a Power Source

The AC power cord must have a three-prong female connector on one end that plugs into the
mating AC power connector at the rear of the printer. If a power cable was not included with
your printer, refer to Power Cord Specifications on page 41.
Caution For personnel and equipment safety, always use an approved three-conductor
power cord specific to the region or country intended for installation. This cord must use an
IEC 320 female connector and the appropriate region-specific three-conductor grounded
plug configuration.

To connect the printer to a power source, complete these steps:

1. Toggle the printer power switch to the off (O) position.
2. Plug the power cord into the AC power connector (1) on the rear of the printer.

3. Plug the other end of the power cord into a power outlet near the printer.
4. Turn on (I) the printer.

The control panel LCD and lights activate, indicating that the printer is booting up.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

System Description
Connect the Printer to a Power Source

Power Cord Specifications

Caution For personnel and equipment safety, always use an approved three-conductor
power cord specific to the region or country intended for installation. This cord must use an
IEC 320 female connector and the appropriate region-specific, three-conductor grounded
plug configuration.

Depending on how your printer was ordered, a power cord may or may not be included. If one
is not included or if the one included is not suitable for your requirements, see Figure 5 and
refer to the following guidelines:
The overall cord length must be less than 9.8 ft. (3 m).
The cord must be rated for at least 10 A, 250 V.
The chassis ground (earth) must be connected to ensure safety and reduce electromagnetic
interference.
Figure 5 Power Cord Specifications
2
1

4
1
2
3
4

AC power plug for your countryThis should bear

the certification mark of at least one of the known
international safety organizations (Figure 6).
3-conductor HAR cable or other cable approved for
your country.
IEC 320 connectorThis should bear the
certification mark of at least one of the known
international safety organizations (Figure 6).
Length 9.8 ft. (3 m). Rating 10 Amp, 250 VAC.

Figure 6 International Safety Organization Certifications

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

System Description
Select a Data Communication Interface

Select a Data Communication Interface

Table 5 provides basic information about data communication interfaces that you can use to
connect your printer to a computer. You may send label formats to the printer through any data
communication interface that is available. Select an interface that is supported by both your
printer and your computer or your Local Area Network (LAN).
Table 5 also shows how to connect the different types of data cables to your printer and
computer. The connectors on the back of your computer may be in different locations than on
the sample computer shown in this section.
Caution Ensure that the printer power is off (O) before connecting data communications
cables. Connecting a data communications cable while the power is on (I) may damage the
printer.

Table 5 Data Communication Interfaces

Interface

Standard or
Optional

RS-232 Serial

Standard

Description

Limitations and Requirements

Maximum cable length of 50 ft (15.24 m).
You may need to change printer parameters to match the host
computer.
You need to use a null-modem adaptor to connect to the printer
if using a standard modem cable.
Connections and Configuration The baud rate, number of
data and stop bits, the parity, and the XON/XOFF or DTR control
must match those of the host computer. See Control Panel
Parameters on page 78 to view or change these parameters.

IEEE 1284
Bidirectional Parallel

Standard

Limitations and Requirements

Maximum cable length of 10 ft (3 m).
Recommended cable length of 6 ft (1.83 m).
No printer parameter changes required to match the host
computer.

Connections and Configuration No additional

configuration is necessary. An Ethernet print server (if installed)
takes up or covers this port on the printer.
USB

Standard

Limitations and Requirements

Maximum cable length of 16.4 ft (5 m).
No printer parameter changes required to match the host
computer.

Connections and Configuration No additional

configuration is necessary.
Caution Be careful not to plug the USB cable into the wired
Ethernet print server connector on the printer because doing so
will damage the connector.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

System Description
Select a Data Communication Interface

Table 5 Data Communication Interfaces (Continued)

Standard or
Optional

Interface

Description

Limitations and Requirements

Can print to the printer from any computer on your LAN.
Can communicate with the printer through the printers web
pages when in ZPL mode.
The printer must be configured to use your LAN.

Internal wired
Ethernet print server

Connections and Configuration Refer to the ZebraNet

10/100 Print Server User and Reference Guide for configuration
instructions. A copy of this manual is available at
http://www.zebra.com/manuals or on the user CD that came with
your printer.
Note To use this connection, you may need to remove a
factory-installed plug that is designed to keep someone
from accidentally plugging a USB connector into this port.
Wireless Ethernet
print server

Optional

Limitations and Requirements

Can print to the printer from any computer on your Wireless
Local Area Network (WLAN).
Can communicate with the printer through the printers web
pages when in ZPL mode.
The printer must be configured to use your WLAN.

Configuration Refer to the ZebraNet Wireless User Guide for

configuration instructions. A copy of this manual is available at
http://www.zebra.com/manuals or on the user CD that came with
your printer.

Data Cables
You must supply all data cables for your application.
Ethernet cables do not require shielding, but all other data cables must be fully shielded and
fitted with metal or metallized connector shells. Unshielded data cables may increase radiated
emissions above the regulated limits.
To minimize electrical noise pickup in the cable:
Keep data cables as short as possible.
Do not bundle the data cables tightly with the power cords.
Do not tie the data cables to power wire conduits.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

System Description
Types of Media

Types of Media
The printer can use various types of media (Table 6).
Table 6 Types of Media
Media Type

How It Looks

Description

Non-Continuous
Roll Media

Roll media is wound on a core that can be 1 in. to 3 in. (25 to

76 mm) in diameter. Labels have adhesive backing that sticks
them to a liner, and they are separated by gaps, holes, notches,
or black marks. Tags are separated by perforations.

Continuous
Roll Media

Roll media is wound on a core that can be 1 in. to 3 in. (25 to

76 mm) in diameter.
Continuous roll media does not have gaps, holes, notches, or
black marks to indicate label separations. This allows the
image to be printed anywhere on the label. Sometimes a cutter
is used to cut apart individual labels.

RFID Smart
Media
(for use only with
printers that have
an RFID
reader/encoder
installed)

Radio frequency identification (RFID) smart labels are

made from the same materials and adhesives as non-RFID
labels. Each label has an RFID transponder, made of a chip
and an antenna, embedded between the label and the liner
(sometimes called an inlay). The shape of the transponder
varies by manufacturer and is visible through the label.
All smart labels have memory that can be read, and many
have memory that can be encoded.
Important Transponder placement within a label
depends on the transponder type and the printer model.
Make sure that you are using the correct smart media
for your printer.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

System Description
Ribbon Overview

Ribbon Overview
Note This section applies only to printers that have the Thermal Transfer option installed.

Ribbon is a thin film that is coated on one side with wax, resin, or wax resin, which is
transferred to the media during the thermal transfer process.

When to Use Ribbon

Thermal transfer media requires ribbon for printing while direct thermal media does not.
To determine if ribbon must be used with a particular media, perform a media scratch test.

To perform a media scratch test, complete these steps:

1. Scratch the print surface of the media rapidly with your fingernail.
2. Did a black mark appear on the media?

If a black mark...

Then the media is...

Does not appear on the media

Thermal transfer. A ribbon is required.

Appears on the media

Direct thermal. No ribbon is required.

Coated Side of Ribbon

1. Peel a label from its liner.
2. Press a corner of the sticky side of the label to the outer surface of the roll of ribbon.
3. Peel the label off of the ribbon.
4. Observe the results. Did flakes or particles of ink from the ribbon adhere to the label?

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

System Description
General Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Height

11.6 in.

295 mm

Width

10.7 in.

272 mm

Depth

18.8 in.

477 mm

Weight (without options)

27.2 lbs.

12.4 kg

Electrical

90264 VAC, 4763 Hz, 3 Amps (100 W)

Temperature
Relative Humidity

Operating

40 to 104F

5 to 40C

Storage

40 to 140F

40 to 60C

Operating

20% to 85%, non-condensing

Storage

5% to 85%, non-condensing

Communication Interface

13291L-006 Rev. A

RS-232/CCITT V.24 serial data interface; 110

to 115000 baud, parity, bits/character, 7 or 8
data bit, and XON-XOFF, RTS/CTS or
DTR/DSR handshake protocol required.
750mA at 5 V from pins 1 and 9.
USB 1.1 data interface
One of the following:
8-bit parallel data interface; supports IEEE
1284 bidirectional parallel; nibble mode
compliant.
10/100 internal Ethernet
802.11b/g wireless card support

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

System Description
Agency Approvals

Agency Approvals

5/4/11

Agency Approvals

IEC60950-1
EN55022: Class B
EN55024
EN61000-3-2,-3-3

Product Markings

cULus
CE Marking
FCC-B
ICES-003
VCCI
C-Tick
NOM
CCC
GOST-R
S-Mark (Argentina)
MIC
BSMI

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

System Description
Printing Specifications

Printing Specifications
Printing Specifications

Print resolution
Dot size
(width x length)

13291L-006 Rev. A

203 dots/inch

8 dots/mm

300 dots/inch

12 dots/mm

203 dpi

0.00492 in. x 0.00492 in. 0.125 mm x

0.125 mm

300 dpi

0.0033 in. x 0.0039 in.

0.084 mm x 0.099
mm

Maximum print
width

203 dpi

4.09 in.

104 mm

300 dpi

4.1 in.

106 mm

Bar code modulus

(X) dimension

203 dots/inch

5 mil to 50 mil

300 dots/inch

3.3 mil to 33 mil

Programmable
constant print speeds

203 dots/inch
and 300
dots/inch

Per second:
2 in.
3 in.
4 in.
5 in.
6 in.

S4M Maintenance Manual

Per second:
51 mm
76 mm
102 mm
127 mm
152 mm

5/4/11

System Description
Media Specifications

Media Specifications
Media Specifications

Label length

Minimum (Tear-Off)

0.7 in.

17.8 mm

Minimum (Peel-Off)

0.5 in.

12.7 mm

Maximum

39 in.

991 mm

Minimum

0.75 in.

19 mm

Maximum

4.5 in.

114 mm

Total thickness
(includes liner, if any)

Minimum

0.003 in.

0.076 mm

Maximum

0.010 in.

0.25 mm

Maximum roll outside

diameter

3-in. (76 mm) core

8 in.

203 mm

1-in. (25 mm) core

6 in.

152 mm

Inter-label gap

Minimum

0.079 in.

2 mm

Preferred

0.118 in.

3 mm

Maximum

0.157 in.

4 mm

Ticket/tag notch size (width x length)

0.25 in. 0.12 in.

6 mm 3 mm

Hole diameter

0.125 in.

3 mm

Minimum

0.15 in.

3.8 mm

Maximum

2.25 in.

57 mm

Label width

Notch or hole position

(Centered from inner
media edge)

Density, in Optical Density Units (ODU) (black mark)

> 1.0 ODU

Maximum media density

< 0.5 ODU

Transmissive Sensor

5/4/11

Fixed

7/16 in. (11 mm) from inside edge

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

System Description
Ribbon Specifications

Ribbon Specifications

Note This section applies only to printers that have the Thermal Transfer option installed.

Ribbon must be wound with the coated side out.

Ribbon Specifications

Ribbon width
(Zebra recommends using ribbon at least as
wide as the media to protect the printhead
from wear.)

Minimum

>2 in.*

51 mm*

Maximum

4.3 in.

109 mm

Standard lengths

2:1 media to ribbon roll

ratio

984 ft.

300 m

3:1 media to ribbon roll

ratio

1476 ft.

450 m

1 in.

25.4 mm

Ribbon core inside diameter

* Depending on your application, you may be able to use ribbon narrower than 2 in. (51 mm), as long as the ribbon is wider
than the media being used. To use a narrower ribbon, test the ribbons performance with your media to assure that you get the
desired results.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

System Description
Zebra Programming Language (ZPL II)

Zebra Programming Language (ZPL II)

Communicates in printable ASCII

characters
Controlled via mainframe, mini, or PC
Downloadable graphics, scalable and
bitmap fonts, label templates and
formats
Object copying between memory areas
(RAM and PC memory card)
Adjustable print cache
Data compression
Automatic memory allocation for
format while printing

Status messages to host upon request

Format inversion (white on black)
Mirror image printing
Four-position field rotation
(normal/0, 90, 180, and 270)
Slew command
Programmable label quantities with print
and pause control
Automatic serialization of fields
User-programmable password

Bar Codes
Bar code modulus X dimensions
Picket fence (non-rotated) orientation:
203 dpi = 0.0049 in. mil to 0.049 in.
300 dpi = 0.0033 in. mil to 0.033 in.
Ladder (rotated) orientation:
203 dpi = 0.0049 in. mil to 0.049 in.
300 dpi = 0.0039 in. mil to 0.039 in.
Two-dimensional bar codes
Code 49
Maxi Code
PDF-417
QR Code
Codablock
DataMatrix
Micro-PDF417
Bar code ratios
2:1
7:3
5:2
3:1

5/4/11

Linear bar codes

Code 11
Code 39
Code 93
Code 128 with subsets A/B C and
UCC Case Codes
ISBT-128
UPC-A
UPC-E
EAN-8
EAN-13
UPC and EAN 2 or 5 digit extensions
Plessey
Postnet
Standard 2 of 5
Industrial 2 of 5
Interleaved 2 of 5
LOGMARS
MSI
Codabar
RSS-14

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

System Description
Standard Font Matrices

Standard Font Matrices

Bit mapped fonts A, B, D, E, F, G, H, and GS are expandable up to 10 times, height and width
independent. However, fonts E and H (OCR-B and OCR-A) are not in spec when expanded.
The Scalable Smooth Font (CG Triumvirate Bold Condensed) is expandable on a dot-by-dot
basis, height and width independent, while maintaining smooth edges, to a maximum of 1500
1500 dots.
IBM Code Page 850 International characters are available in fonts A, B, D, E, F, G, and
through software control.
Table 7 Font Matrix for 8 dot/mm (203 dpi) Printheads
Matrix
Font
Height

Width

Type*

Character Size
Inches

Millimeters

Baseline
Dots

InterCharacter
Gap

Cell
Width

Font
Matrix

Height

Width

Char/
Inch

Height

Width

Char/
mm
1.33

U-L-D

0.044

0.030

33.87

1.13

0.75

0.054

0.044

22.58

1.38

1.13

0.89

C,D

U-L-D

0.089

0.059

16.93

2.25

1.50

0.67

OCR-B

0.138

0.098

10.16

3.50

2.50

0.40

U-L-D

0.128

0.079

12.70

3.25

2.00

0.50

U-L-D

0.295

0.236

4.23

7.50

6.00

0.17

OCR-A

0.103

0.094

10.69

2.63

2.38

0.42

SYMBOL

0.118

0.128

7.82

3.00

3.25

0.31

N/A

U-L-D

0.098

0.089

N/A

2.50

2.25

N/A

U-L-D

0.138

0.118

N/A

3.50

3.00

N/A

U-L-D

0.172

0.153

N/A

4.38

3.88

N/A

U-L-D

0.197

0.172

N/A

5.00

4.38

N/A

U-L-D

0.236

0.207

N/A

6.00

5.25

N/A

U-L-D

0.290

0.261

N/A

7.38

6.63

N/A

U-L-D

0.394

0.349

N/A

10.00

8.88

N/A

Default: 15 x 12

U-L-D

Scalable

*U = Uppercase, L = Lowercase, D = Descenders

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

System Description
Standard Font Matrices

Table 8 Font Matrix for 12 dot/mm (300 dpi) Printheads

Matrix
Font
Height Width

Type*

Character Size
Inches

Baseline
Dots

InterCharacter
Gap

Cell
Width

Font
Matrix

Height

Width

Millimeters
Char/
Inch

Height

Width

Char/
mm

U-L-D

0.030

0.020

50.00

0.76

0.51

1.97

0.037

0.030

33.33

0.93

0.76

1.31
0.98

C, D

U-L-D

0.060

0.040

25.00

1.52

1.02

OCR-B

0.137

0.087

11.54

3.47

2.20

0.45

U-L-D

0.087

0.053

18.75

2.20

1.35

0.74

U-L-D

0.200

0.160

6.25

5.08

4.06

0.25

OCR-A

0.100

0.093

10.71

2.54

2.37

0.42

Symbol

0.080

0.087

11.54

2.03

2.20

0.45

N/A

U-L-D

0.067

0.060

N/A

1.69

1.52

N/A

U-L-D

0.093

0.080

N/A

2.37

2.03

N/A

U-L-D

0.117

0.103

N/A

2.96

2.62

N/A

U-L-D

0.133

0.117

N/A

3.39

2.96

N/A

U-L-D

0.160

0.140

N/A

4.06

3.56

N/A

U-L-D

0.197

0.177

N/A

5.00

4.49

N/A

U-L-D

0.267

0.237

N/A

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

Operations
Load Media

6. Slide out the media guide.

7. Feed the media under the dancer assembly (1), through the slot in the transmissive

sensor (2standard transmissive sensor shown), and under the ribbon sensor (3).
3 2

8. Push the media to the back of the transmissive sensor (1). Slide in the media guide (2)

until it touches the edge of the media.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Operations
Load Media

9. Close the printhead assembly.

10. If the printer is paused (the PAUSE light is blinking), press PAUSE to enable printing.
11. If the printer is paused (the PAUSE light is blinking), press PAUSE to enable printing.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

Operations
Load Ribbon

Load Ribbon
Note This section applies only to printers that have the Thermal Transfer option installed.

Figure 8 Ribbon Path

1
2
3
4

13291L-006 Rev. A

Printhead assembly
Ribbon supply spindle
Ribbon take-up spindle
Tension blades

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Operations
Load Ribbon

To load ribbon, complete these steps:

1. Set the ribbon supply spindle for normal or low tension.

To place the ribbon supply spindle in the normal position, firmly pull out the spindle
end cap until it extends and clicks in place, as shown in Figure 9. Use this setting for
most applications.

To place the ribbon supply spindle in the low-tension position, firmly push in the end
cap until it retracts and clicks in place, as shown in Figure 9. Use this setting when
using a narrow ribbon or if normal tension hampers ribbon movement.
Figure 9 Ribbon SpindleNormal and Low Tension
1

1
2

Normal Position (Spindle End Cap Extended)

Low-Tension Position (Spindle End Cap Retracted)

2. Press the printhead release latch to open the printhead assembly. Lift the printhead until it

latches open.

3. Orient the ribbon with the loose end unrolling clockwise.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

Operations
Load Ribbon

4. Place the roll of ribbon on the ribbon supply spindle (1) and push it all the way back.

5. Pull the end of the ribbon under the printhead assembly (1) and out the front of the printer.

6. Close the printhead assembly.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Operations
Load Ribbon

7. Wind the ribbon clockwise onto the ribbon take-up spindle (1).

Remove Used Ribbon

Remove used ribbon from the ribbon take-up spindle each time you change the roll of ribbon.
Remove used ribbon from the ribbon take-up spindle each time you change the roll of ribbon
or when switching from thermal transfer mode to direct thermal mode.

To remove used ribbon, complete these steps:

Caution Do not cut the ribbon directly on the ribbon take-up spindle. Doing so may
damage the spindle.

If the ribbon has not run out, cut or break it before the ribbon take-up spindle (1).

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

Operations
Load Ribbon

2. To loosen the ribbon, squeeze it against the ribbon take-up spindle tension blades (1). At

the same time, turn the ribbon take-up spindle release knob counterclockwise (2).

The tension blades collapse into the ribbon take-up spindle, loosening the ribbon.
1

Figure 11 Adjusting the Reflective Sensor

3
4

1
2
3
4

Printhead assembly
Reflective sensor
Reflective sensor positioning lever
Printhead release latch

To adjust the reflective sensor, complete these steps:

1. See Figure 11. Press the printhead release latch.
2. Lift the printhead until it latches open.
3. Locate the reflective sensor positioning lever.
4. Move the reflective sensor positioning lever across the width of the media until the

reflective sensor aligns with the gap or notch.

5. Close the printhead assembly.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

Operations
Adjust Printhead Pressure

Adjust Printhead Pressure

You may need to adjust printhead pressure if printing is too light on one side, if you use thick
media, or if the media drifts from side to side during printing.
See Figure 12. The pressure adjustment dials have four possible settings designated by blocks
of increasing size embossed on the print mechanism. The smallest block (fully
counterclockwise) is considered position 1, and the largest block (fully clockwise) is
considered position 4.
Figure 12 Printhead Pressure Adjustment Dials
1

1
2

Outside dial
Inside dial

To set printhead pressure, complete these steps:

1. Use Table 9 to select the initial dial settings for your media.

Table 9 Printhead Pressure

Inside Dial

Outside Dial

1 in. (25.4 mm)

2 in. (51 mm)

3 in. (76 mm)

3.5 in. and up (89 mm and up)

Media Width

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Operations
Adjust Printhead Pressure

2. If necessary, adjust the pressure adjustment dials as follows:

5/4/11

If the media...

Then...

Requires higher pressure to

print well

Increase both dials one position.

Shifts left while printing

Increase the outside dial setting one position, or

decrease the inside dial setting one position.

Shifts right while printing

Increase the inside dial setting one position, or

decrease the outside dial setting one position.

Prints too lightly on the left side

of the label.

Increase the inside dial setting one position.

Prints too lightly on the right

side of the label.

Increase the outside dial setting one position.

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

Operations
Setup Mode

Setup Mode
After you have installed the media and ribbon and the Power-On Self Test (POST) is complete,
the control panel displays PRINTER READY. You may now set printer parameters for your
application using the control panel LCD and the buttons directly below it. If it becomes
necessary to restore the initial printer defaults, see FEED and PAUSE Self Test on page 132.

Enter Setup Mode

To enter Setup mode, complete these steps:
1. Press MENU.
2. Use the left or right arrow to scroll through the parameters.

Leave Setup Mode

You can leave Setup mode at any time. As you leave Setup mode, you may choose to save or
discard changes that you made, or you may return to where you were in Setup mode.

To exit Setup mode, complete these steps:

1. Press MENU.

The printer displays SAVE CHANGES and activates the ENTER button.
2. Do you wish to save changes that were made since you entered Setup mode?

If you wish to...

Then...

Save changes

a. If necessary, press the up or down arrow to select YES.

b. Press ENTER.

The printer saves changes and exits Setup mode.

Discard changes

a. Press the up or down arrow to select NO.

b. Press ENTER.

The printer discards changes and exits Setup mode.

Return to Setup mode

13291L-006 Rev. A

Press one of the following buttons:

MENU returns you to the same parameter.
The left arrow takes you to the previous parameter.
The right arrow takes you to the next parameter.

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Operations
Password Protection of Parameters

Password Protection of Parameters

The printer has four levels of passwords. When you enter Setup mode on the control panel,
only those parameters that are not password-protected are displayed. To see more parameters,
you must enter an appropriate password at the ADVANCED SETUP prompt. After you enter a
password correctly, you do not have to enter it again until you leave and reenter Setup mode.
When you are prompted for a password, enter the password for the level displayed or for a
higher level. Entering a higher level password will unprotect the parameters for that level and
for all levels below it (for example, unprotecting level 4 parameters also unprotects levels 1, 2,
and 3).
The password levels and default passwords are shown in Table 10. To change the password for
any level, use the ^KP ZPL II command.
Table 10 Password Levels and Defaults
Password
Level

Features Controlled

Default Password

All features, including sensor adjustments

and other sensitive parameters

9999

Installation and reconfiguration. The printer

web-page interface also uses this password.

1234

Label configuration operations (media type,

label removal method, label length)

0000 (unprotected)

Darkness, Tear-Off position, label top

0000 (unprotected)

To enter a password when prompted, complete these steps:

1. When the printer displays ADVANCED

SETUP X, press ENTER.

The printer displays PASSWORD and the number 0000.

2. Enter the four-digit password for the password level displayed or for a higher level.

The left and right arrows change the selected digit position.

The up and down arrows change the value of the selected digit.

3. After entering the password, press ENTER.

If you entered a valid password, additional parameters are displayed.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

Operations
Password Protection of Parameters

Note When you enter a password at an ADVANCED SETUP prompt, the first parameter

that you see is determined in part by whether you pressed the right arrow or the left arrow to
get to the ADVANCED SETUP prompt:
If you used the right arrow, the first parameter that you see is based on the password level
that the printer prompted for (see Table 11).
If you used the left arrow, the first parameter that you see is based on which password you
enter at the prompt, regardless of which password level the printer prompted for
(see Table 12).
Table 11 Right Arrow Used to Reach ADVANCED SETUP Prompt
Advanced
Setup Level
Prompted

Password
Level
Entered

First Parameter Seen

1, 2, 3, or 4

DARKNESS (top of level 1)

2, 3, or 4

3 or 4

MEDIA TYPE (top of level 2)

PRINT OUT (top of level 3)
LABEL LEVEL (top of level 4)

Table 12 Left Arrow Used to Reach ADVANCED SETUP Prompt

Advanced
Setup Level
Prompted

Password
Level
Entered

First Parameter Seen

LABEL TOP (ZPL, EPL, APL-D)

(bottom of level 1)

Y FORMS ADJUST (APL-I)

(bottom of level 1)
1, 2

LENGTH
(bottom of level 2)

1, 2, 3

LANGUAGE
(bottom of level 3)

1, 2, 3, or 4

LANGUAGE

(bottom of level 4; LANGUAGE parameter appears in

both level 3 and 4)

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Operations
Password Protection of Parameters

Changing Printer Passwords Using ZPL II

To change the password for any level, use the ^KP ZPL II command. The format is KPa,b
where a is the password and b is the password level.
Password-Protect All Parameters. To password protect all parameters, send the
^KP ZPL II command with a different password for each level.
Disable Password To disable the password-protection feature for a particular level and
those below it, set the password to 0000 using the ^KP ZPL II command. To enable the
password-protection feature, send the ZPL II command with any non-zero number for a
password.
Return to Default Passwords If you forget your passwords, the printer can be returned to
the default factory settings, which makes the default passwords valid again. Use caution when
returning the passwords to their default values because this also sets all other printer
parameters back to their defaults.
To return the printer to the default factory settings using ZPL, send this command:

^XA
^JUF
^XZ

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

Operations
Printing Configuration Labels

Printing Configuration Labels

After you load the media and ribbon (if necessary), print a printer configuration label and a
network configuration label as records of your printers current settings. Keep the labels to use
when troubleshooting printing problems. The options to print these labels are located in
password level 3.
A configuration label lists the printer settings that are stored in configuration memory. A
network configuration label lists the print server settings. For the correct settings, print a
network configuration label after the printer connects to the network.
Note If the printer is paused when you enter Setup mode, these labels will print after you exit
Setup mode and resume printing.

To print a printer configuration label or a network configuration label, complete

these steps:
1. On the control panel, press MENU.

The printer enters Setup mode and displays DARKNESS.

2. Press the left arrow.

If a password is set for any levels, the printer displays ADVANCED SETUP with the level
number, and the ENTER button is enabled. If no passwords are set, the printer displays
LANGUAGE.
3. What does the printer display?

13291L-006 Rev. A

If the printer displays...

Then...

ADVANCED SETUP 1
ADVANCED SETUP 2
ADVANCED SETUP 3

a. Press ENTER.

ADVANCED SETUP 4

You do not need to enter a password to access this

parameter. Use the left or right arrow to scroll through the
parameters until you reach PRINT OUT.

LANGUAGE

Use the left or right arrow to scroll through the parameters

Operations
Select a Display Language

Select a Display Language

The LANGUAGE parameter is included in password level 3 and level 4 so you can easily reach
the parameter to select a familiar language if you cannot read the one being displayed.

To change the language displayed, complete these steps:

1. On the control panel, press MENU.

The printer enters Setup mode.

2. Press the left arrow.

If a password is set for level 3 or 4, the printer displays ADVANCED SETUP with the
level number, and the ENTER button is enabled. If no passwords are set for level 3 or 4,
the printer displays LANGUAGE.
3. What does the printer display?

If the printer displays...

ADVANCED
ADVANCED
ADVANCED
ADVANCED

LANGUAGE*

SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP

1*
2*
3*
4*

Then...
a. Press ENTER.

The printer displays PASSWORD 0000*.

a. Use the left and right arrows to enter the password for
level 3 or 4.
b. Press ENTER.
The printer displays LANGUAGE*.
Continue with the next step.

* Displays in the last language selected.

4. Use the up and down arrows until you reach the language of your choice.
5. Press MENU.

The printer prompts you to accept changes.

6. If necessary, press the up or down arrow to select YES.
7. Press ENTER to accept the language that you selected.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

Operations
Control Panel Parameters

Control Panel Parameters

Use the LCD on the control panel to adjust printer settings.
Additional parameters appear in the following situations:
When a wired print server is installed in the printer. For more information, refer to the
ZebraNet 10/100 Print Server User and Reference Guide.
When a wireless print server is installed in the printer. For more information, refer to the
ZebraNet Wireless User Guide.
Copies of these manuals are available at http://www.zebra.com/manuals or on the user CD that
came with your printer.

Password Level 1 and 2 Parameters

Table 13 shows parameters in the order in which they appear when you press the right arrow
after entering Setup mode. Throughout this process, press the right arrow to continue to the
next parameter or the left arrow to return to the previous parameter in the cycle.
Table 13 Printer Parameters, Password Levels 1 and 2 (Page 1 of 5)
Parameter

Explanation

DARKNESS

Adjust Print Darkness

The best darkness setting depends on a variety of factors, including ribbon
type, labels, and the condition of the printhead. You may adjust the
darkness for consistent high-quality printing.
Important Set the darkness to the lowest setting that provides
good print quality. If the darkness is set too high, the ink may smear,
the ribbon may burn through, or the printhead may wear
prematurely.
Note The printer applies and saves the darkness setting
immediately. Exiting Setup mode without saving changes does not
restore the previous value.
If printing is too light or if there are voids in the printed areas, increase the
darkness. If the printing is too dark or if there is spreading or bleeding of
printed areas, decrease the darkness. Darkness settings also may be
changed by the driver or software settings.
The FEED Self Test on page 130 can be used to determine the best darkness
setting. Because the darkness setting takes effect immediately, you can see
the results on labels that are currently printing.
Range (ZPL, APL-D, APL-I): 0.0 to +30.0
Default Value (ZPL, APL-D, APL-I): +10.0
Range (EPL): 7
Default Value (EPL): 0 to 15

(ZPL, APL-D, and APL-I

modes)

DENSITY
(EPL mode only)

To modify this parameter:

13291L-006 Rev. A

Press the up arrow to increase value.

Press the down arrow to decrease value.

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Operations
Control Panel Parameters

Table 13 Printer Parameters, Password Levels 1 and 2 (Page 2 of 5)

Parameter

Explanation

TEAR OFF

Adjust Tear-Off Position

This parameter establishes the position of the labels over the
tear-off/peel-off bar after printing.
Note The printer applies and saves the tear-off setting
immediately. Exiting Setup mode without saving changes does not
restore the previous value.
Range (ZPL, EPL, APL-I): -120 to +120
Default Value (ZPL, EPL, APL-I): 0
Range (APL-D): +00i to +999i (0m to 2537m)
Default Value (APL-D): +128i
To modify this parameter:

LABEL TOP
(ZPL, EPL, and APL-D
modes)

X FORMS ADJUST
(APL-I mode only)

Press the up arrow to increase value.

Press the down arrow to decrease value.

Adjust Label Top Position

The label top position adjusts the print position vertically on the label.
Positive numbers adjust the label top position farther down the label (away
from the printhead), and negative numbers adjust the position up the label
(toward the printhead).
Range (ZPL, EPL): -120 to +120
Range (APL-I): -10 to +4000
Range (APL-D): -0.64i to 0.64i
Default Value: 0
To modify this parameter:

LEFT POSITION
(ZPL, EPL, and APL-D
modes)

Y FORMS ADJUST
(APL-I mode only)

To increase the value, press the up arrow.

To decrease the value, press the down arrow.

Adjust Label Left Position

The label left position adjusts the print position horizontally on the label.
Positive numbers move the left edge of the image toward the center of the
label while negative numbers shift the left edge of the image toward the left
edge of the label.
Range (ZPL, EPL, APL-D): -120 to +120
Range (APL-I): -9999 to +9999
Default Value: 0
To modify this parameter:

5/4/11

To increase the value, press the up arrow.

To decrease the value, press the down arrow.

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

Operations
Control Panel Parameters

Table 13 Printer Parameters, Password Levels 1 and 2 (Page 3 of 5)

Parameter

Explanation

MEDIA TYPE

Set Media Type

Tells the printer which type of media you are using.
Selections:
GAP/NOTCHUse for non-continuous web media,
non-continuous fanfold media, and tag stock.
CONTINUOUSUse for media that does not have divisions
between labels.
MARKUse for non-continuous black mark media.
Default Value: GAP/NOTCH
To modify this parameter:

SENSOR SELECT

Press the up or down arrow to scroll through the selections.

Select the Media Sensor

Use the setting that gives the best results. You can use the reflective sensor
for most media.
REFLECTIVEUse with black mark media and most other media
types.
TRANSMISSIVEUse with any media (other than black mark
media) that does not work well with the reflective sensor.
To use the transmissive sensor with media that has holes or notches,
verify that the holes or notches pass through the sensor so that the
sensor can detect them. If the holes or notches do not pass through
the sensor, use the reflective sensor.
Default Value: REFLECTIVE
To modify this parameter:

REMOVAL

Press the up or down arrow to scroll through the selections.

Select the Label Removal Method

The label removal must correspond to the print mode. Be sure to select a
label removal mode that your hardware configuration supports because
some of the selections displayed are for optional printer features.
Selections: TEAR, PEEL, CUTTER, REWIND, DELAYED CUT
Default Value: TEAR
To modify this parameter:

13291L-006 Rev. A

Press the up or down arrow to scroll through the selections.

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Operations
Control Panel Parameters

Table 13 Printer Parameters, Password Levels 1 and 2 (Page 4 of 5)

Parameter

Explanation

PRINT SPEED

Adjust Print Speed

Adjusts the speed for printing a label (given in whole numbers of inches per
second). Slower print speeds typically yield better print quality. Print speed
changes take effect upon exiting Setup mode.
Range: 2 to 6 IPS
Default Value (ZPL, APL-I): 2 IPS
Default Value (EPL, APL-D): 6 IPS
To modify this parameter:

PRINT WIDTH

To increase the value, press the up arrow.

To decrease the value, press the down arrow.

Set Print Width

Print width determines the printable area across the width of the label.
Important Setting the width too narrow can result in portions of
the label not being printed on the media. Setting the width too wide
wastes formatting memory and can cause printing off the label and
on the platen roller. This setting can affect the horizontal position of
the label format if the image was inverted using the ^POI ZPL II
command.
Range: 2 to 832 for 8 dots/mm, 2 to 1248 for 12 dots/mm
Default Value: 832 for 8 dots/mm, 1248 for 12 dots/mm
To modify this parameter:

KDU MODE
(EPL mode only)

To increase the value, press the up arrow.

To decrease the value, press the down arrow.

Enable KDU
Allows the S4M printer to work with a Keyboard Display Unit (Zebra
KDU or KDU Plus).
Selections: ON, OFF
Default Value: OFF
To modify this parameter:

COMPAT. MODE
(APL-D mode only)

Press the up or down arrow to scroll through the selections.

Set APL-D Compatibility Mode

Sets compatibility with some older DPL printers. The default label top
changes from 1.1 inches to 2.5 inches.
Selections: ON, OFF
Default Value: OFF
To modify this parameter:

5/4/11

Press the up or down arrow to scroll through the selections.

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

Operations
Control Panel Parameters

Table 13 Printer Parameters, Password Levels 1 and 2 (Page 5 of 5)

Parameter

Explanation

CONTROL CODES

Set APL-D Control Codes

Allows you to select which set of language control codes will be sent to the
printer.
Selections: STANDARD, MAINFRAME
Default Value: STANDARD

(APL-D mode only)

To modify this parameter:

RESOLUTION
(APL-I mode only)

Press the up or down arrow to scroll through the selections.

Set Printer Resolution for APL-I

Sets the dot size for backward compatibility with some older APL-I
printers.
Selections: 5 MIL, 10 MIL, 15 MIL
Default Value: 5 MIL
To modify this parameter:

LENGTH

Press the up or down arrow to scroll through the selections.

Set Maximum Label Length

Maximum label length is used in conjunction with the calibration
procedure. The value of this setting is the maximum label length that is
used during the media portion of the calibration process. Only a few labels
are required to set media sensors. Always set the value that is at least 1 in.
(25.4 mm) longer than the longest label to be used on the printer.
Selections (ZPL, EPL, APL-I): AUTO, < 1 INCH (25.4 mm) to < 39 INCH
(991 mm) in 1-inch (25.4 mm) increments
Default Value AUTO
Selections (APL-D): 0000 to 9999 (tenths of inches)
Default Value (APL-D): 1200
To modify this parameter:

To increase the value, press the up arrow.

To decrease the value, press the down arrow.

Password Level 3 Parameters

Table 14 shows parameters in the order in which they appear when you press the right arrow
after entering the Level 3 password. Throughout this process, press the right arrow to continue
to the next parameter or the left arrow to return to the previous parameter in the cycle.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Operations
Control Panel Parameters

Table 14 Printer Parameters, Password Level 3 (Page 1 of 9)

Parameter

Explanation

PRINT OUT

Print Selected Labels

This parameter allows you to print certain types of labels with information
about the printer.
Selections:
SETTINGSPrints a printer configuration label. See Printing
Configuration Labels on page 74.
FONTS (ZPL, EPL, APL-D)Prints a label that lists the available
fonts in the printer, including standard printer fonts plus any
optional fonts. Fonts may be stored in RAM, Flash memory,
optional memory cards, or font cards.
FORMATS (ZPL, EPL, APL-D)Prints a label that lists the
available formats stored in the printers RAM, Flash memory, or
optional memory card.
BARCODES (ZPL only)Prints a label that lists the available bar
codes in the printer.
ALL (ZPL, EPL)Prints labels that list the available fonts, bar
codes, images, formats, and the current printer and network
configurations.
IMAGES (ZPL, EPL, APL-D)Prints a label that lists the images
currently stored in the printers RAM, Flash memory, or optional
memory cards.
NETWORKPrints a network configuration label. See Printing
Configuration Labels on page 74.
APLI SW SETUP (APL-I only)
APLI HW SETUP (APL-I only)
APLI PRT QUAL (APL-I only)
APLI PITCH (APL-I only)
To print labels:
1. Press the up or down arrow to display label choices.
2. Press ENTER to print the desired label.

MODULE A
(APL-D mode only)

Set Module A Storage Device for APL-D

This parameter allows you to assign an actual 512 KB memory device to a
module letter.
Selections: NONE, RAM 1, RAM 2, FLASH 1, FLASH 2
Default Value: NONE
To modify this parameter:

5/4/11

Press the up or down arrow to scroll through the selections.

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

Operations
Control Panel Parameters

Table 14 Printer Parameters, Password Level 3 (Page 2 of 9)

Parameter

Explanation

MODULE B

Set Module B Storage Device for APL-D

This parameter allows you to assign an actual 512 KB memory device to a
module letter.
Selections: NONE, RAM 1, RAM 2, FLASH 1, FLASH 2
Default Value: NONE

(APL-D mode only)

To modify this parameter:

PARALLEL COMM.

Press the up or down arrow to scroll through the selections.

Set Parallel Communications

Select the communications port that matches the one being used by the host
computer.
Selections: UNIDIRECTIONAL, BIDIRECTIONAL
Default Value: UNIDIRECTIONAL
To modify this parameter:

PRINT PAGE
(APL-I mode only)

Press the up or down arrow to scroll through the selections.

Print Stored APL-I Page

Up to 20 pages can be stored and printed.
Selections: 0 through 19
Default Value: 0
To modify this parameter:

PRINT FORMAT
(APL-I mode only)

To increase the value, press the up arrow.

To decrease the value, press the down arrow.

Print Stored APL-I Format

Up to 100 formats can be stored and printed.
Selections: 0 through 99
Default Value: 0
To modify this parameter:

BAUD

To increase the value, press the up arrow.

To decrease the value, press the down arrow.

Set Baud
The baud setting of the printer must match the baud setting of the host
computer for accurate communications to take place. Select the value that
matches the one being used by the host computer.
Selections (ZPL, APL-I, APL-D): 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400,
19200, 28800, 38400, 57600, 115200
Selections (EPL): 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200
Default Value: 9600
To modify this parameter:

13291L-006 Rev. A

Press the up or down arrow to scroll through the selections.

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Operations
Control Panel Parameters

Table 14 Printer Parameters, Password Level 3 (Page 3 of 9)

Parameter

Explanation

DATA BITS

Set Data Bits

The data bits of the printer must match the data bits of the host computer
for accurate communications to take place. Set the data bits to match the
setting being used by the host computer.
Note Code Page 850 requires the data bits to be set to 8 bits.

Selections: 7 BITS, 8 BITS

Default Value: 8 BITS
To modify this parameter:

STATUS RESPONSE
(APL-I mode only)

Press the up or down arrow to scroll through the selections.

Send APL-I Status Response

Determines if a response is sent after inquiry commands.
Selections: ON, OFF
Default Value: ON
To modify this parameter:

PARITY

Press the up or down arrow to scroll through the selections.

Set Parity
The parity of the printer must match the parity of the host computer for
accurate communications to take place. Select the parity that matches the
one being used by the host computer.
Selections: NONE, ODD, EVEN
Default Value: NONE
To modify this parameter:

HOST HANDSHAKE

Press the up or down arrow to scroll through the selections.

Set Host Handshake

The handshake protocol of the printer must match the handshake protocol
of the host computer for proper communications to take place. Select the
handshake protocol that matches the one being used by the host computer.
Selections (ZPL, APL-D): XON/XOFF, DSR/DTR, RTS/CTS
Selections (APL-I): XON/XOFF, DSR/DTR, RTS/CTS, APL-I
Default Value (ZPL, APL-D, APL-I): XON/XOFF
Selections (EPL): DTR & XON/XOF, DTR
Default Value (EPL): DTR & XON/XOF
Note XOFF is abbreviated as XOF on the EPL display.
To modify this parameter:

5/4/11

Press the up or down arrow to scroll through the selections.

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

Operations
Control Panel Parameters

Table 14 Printer Parameters, Password Level 3 (Page 4 of 9)

Parameter

Explanation

CONTROL CHAR

Set Control Character

The printer looks for this two-digit hexadecimal character to indicate the
start of a ZPL/ZPL II control instruction.
Note Do not use the same hexadecimal value for the control,
command, and delimiter character. The printer must see different
characters to work properly.
Range: 00 to FF
Default Value: 7E (tildedisplayed as an arrow)

(ZPL mode only)

To modify this parameter:

COMMAND CHAR
(ZPL mode only)

To increase the value, press the up arrow.

To decrease the value, press the down arrow.

Set Command Character

The command prefix is a two-digit hexadecimal value used as a parameter
place marker in ZPL/ZPL II format instructions. The printer looks for this
two-digit hexadecimal character to indicate the start of a ZPL/ZPL II
format instruction. See the ZPL II Programming Guide for more
information.
Note Do not use the same hexadecimal value for the control,
command, and delimiter character. The printer must see different
characters to work properly.
Range: 00 to FF
Default Value: 5E (caret)
To modify this parameter:

DELIM. CHAR
(ZPL mode only)

To increase the value, press the up arrow.

To decrease the value, press the down arrow.

Set Delimiter Character

The delimiter character is a two-digit hexadecimal value used as a
parameter place marker in ZPL/ZPL II format instructions. See the ZPL II
Programming Guide for more information.
Note Do not use the same hexadecimal value for the control,
command, and delimiter character. The printer must see different
characters to work properly.
Range: 00 to FF
Default Value: 2C (comma)
To modify this parameter:

13291L-006 Rev. A

To increase the value, press the up arrow.

To decrease the value, press the down arrow.

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Operations
Control Panel Parameters

Table 14 Printer Parameters, Password Level 3 (Page 5 of 9)

Parameter

Explanation

HEXDUMP

Hex Dump
The hexadecimal dump mode is a troubleshooting tool for checking the
interconnection between the printer and the host computer. For more
information, see Communications Diagnostics Test on page 133.
Selections: NO, YES
Default Value: NO
To modify this parameter:

REPRINT MODE
(ZPL mode only)

CHANGE RTC DATE

Press the up or down arrow to scroll through the selections.

Reprint Mode
When Reprint Mode is enabled, the ~PR ZPL command can be used to
reprint the last label. If the Reprint feature is disabled, the ~PR command is
ignored. (Equivalent to the reprint mode parameter in the ^JJ ZPL
command.)
Selections: ENABLED, DISABLED
Default Value: DISABLED
Set RTC (Real-time clock) Date
If RTC is installed, this parameter allows you to set the RTC date.
Note The printer saves the RTC date immediately.
To modify this parameter:
1. Press ENTER.

The printer displays the current RTC date.

1. Modify the values as follows:
Press the right arrow to move to the next digit position.
To increase the value, press the up arrow.
To decrease the value, press the down arrow.
2. Press ENTER to accept the value shown.

CHANGE RTC TIME

Set RTC (Real-time clock) Time

If RTC is installed, this parameter allows you to set the RTC time.
Note The printer saves the RTC time immediately.
To modify this parameter:
1. Press ENTER.

The printer displays the current RTC time.

1. Modify the values as follows:

Press the right arrow to move to the next digit position.

To increase the value, press the up arrow.
To decrease the value, press the down arrow.
2. Press ENTER to accept the value shown.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

Operations
Control Panel Parameters

Table 14 Printer Parameters, Password Level 3 (Page 6 of 9)

Parameter

Explanation

LOAD DEFAULTS

Load Factory Defaults

Sets all parameters back to factory defaults.
Important Use care when using this command. All printer
parameters are reset to factory values with this command. If
possible, print a configuration label to have as a record of the
printers settings before loading defaults.
How to select this parameter:
1. Press ENTER.

The printer asks ARE YOU SURE?

1. To load factory defaults, press ENTER to select YES. To cancel, press

any other key.

DEFAULT NET

Reset Network Parameters

Resets the network parameters back to the factory defaults.
1. Press ENTER.
The printer asks ARE YOU SURE?
1. To reset network parameters to the factory defaults, press ENTER to
select YES. To cancel, press any other key.

INIT FLASH MEM

Initialize Flash Memory

This parameter allows you to erase the printers Flash memory.
Important The internal Flash memory is entirely erased with this
command.
To select this parameter:
1. Press ENTER to select YES.

The printer asks ARE YOU SURE?

1. To initialize Flash memory, press ENTER. To cancel, press any other

key.

RIBBON

Set Ribbon Use

Note This parameter appears only for printers that have the
Thermal Transfer option installed.
Specifies the printing method: thermal transfer (using ribbon) or
direct thermal (no ribbon).
Selections:
YES (thermal transfer mode, with ribbon)
NO (direct thermal mode, no ribbon)
Default Value: YES
To modify this parameter:

13291L-006 Rev. A

Press the up or down arrow to scroll through the selections.

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Operations
Control Panel Parameters

Table 14 Printer Parameters, Password Level 3 (Page 7 of 9)

Parameter

Explanation

ZPL OVERRIDE

Override Certain ZPL Commands

Allows the following ZPL commands to override the user (printer) settings:
^MM (media mode)
^MT (media type direct thermal or thermal transfer)
^MN (media non-continuous or continuous)
Selections:
NOtells the printer to ignore the listed ZPL commands.
YESallows the printer to accept the listed ZPL commands.
Default Value: YES

(ZPL mode only)

To modify this parameter:

SENSOR PROFILE

Press the up or down arrow to scroll through the selections.

Print Sensor Profile

Use the sensor profile (Figure 15) to troubleshoot registration problems
that may occur if the media sensor detects preprinted areas on the media or
if it experiences difficulty in determining web location. To adjust the
sensitivity of the media and/or ribbon sensors, use Calibrate Media and
Ribbon Sensors on page 90.
Note The ribbon portion of the label appears only for printers that
have the Thermal Transfer option installed.
Figure 15 Sensor Profile

To select this parameter:

1. Press ENTER to start this standard calibration procedure and print a

media sensor profile.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

Operations
Control Panel Parameters

Table 14 Printer Parameters, Password Level 3 (Page 8 of 9)

Parameter

Explanation

MEDIA/RIBBON
CALIBRATE

Calibrate Media and Ribbon Sensors

Use this procedure to adjust the sensitivity of the printers sensors. In a
printer that has the Thermal Transfer option installed, both media and
ribbon sensors are adjusted. In a Direct Thermal printer (no Thermal
Transfer option installed), only media sensors are adjusted, and the LCD
displays for ribbon do not appear in this procedure.
Important This procedure must be followed exactly as presented.
All of the steps must be performed even if only one of the sensors
requires adjustment. You may press the left arrow at any step in this
procedure to cancel the procedure.
How to select this parameter:
1. Press ENTER to start the calibration procedure.
The LOAD BACKING/REMOVE RIBBON prompt displays.
1. Open the printhead.
2. Remove approximately 8 in. (203 mm) of labels from the backing, and
pull the media into the printer so that only the backing is between the
media sensors.
3. Remove the ribbon (if used).
4. Close the printhead.
5. Press ENTER.
The message CALIBRATING PLEASE WAIT displays.
The printer adjusts the scale (gain) of the signals that it receives from
the media and ribbon sensors. On the sensor profile, this essentially
corresponds to moving the peak of the graph up or down to optimize the
readings for your application.
RELOAD ALL displays.
1. Open the printhead and pull the media forward until a label is
positioned under the media sensor.
2. Reload the media and ribbon (if used).
3. Close the printhead.
4. Press ENTER.
The message CALIBRATING PLEASE WAIT displays.
The printer does a calibration; during this process, the printer
determines the label length. To see the new readings on the new scale,
print a sensor profile.

(Thermal Transfer only)

MEDIA CALIBRATE
(Direct Thermal only)

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Operations
Control Panel Parameters

Table 14 Printer Parameters, Password Level 3 (Page 9 of 9)

Parameter

Explanation

LANGUAGE

Select the Display Language

This parameter allows you to display the control panel in the language of
your choice. As soon as you select a language, all parameters are displayed
in that language. Save changes as you exit Setup mode to save the language
setting.
Selections:
English (ENGLISH)
Spanish (ESPANOL)
French (FRANCAIS)
German (Deutsch)
Italian (ITALIANO)
Norwegian (NORSK)
Portuguese (PORTUGUES)
Swedish (SVENSKA)
Danish (DANSK)
Spanish2 (ESPANOL2)
Dutch (NEDERLANDS)
Finnish (SUOMI)
Japanese (appears in Japanese characters)
Default Value: ENGLISH
To modify this parameter:

Press the up or down arrow to scroll through the selections.

Password Level 4 Parameters

Table 15 shows parameters in the order in which they appear when you press the right arrow
after entering the level 4 password. Throughout this process, press the right arrow to continue
to the next parameter or the left arrow to return to the previous parameter in the cycle.
Table 15 Printer Parameters, Password Level 4 (Page 1 of 4)
Parameter

Explanation

LABEL LEVEL

Adjust Label Level

Range: 0 to 100
Default Value: 50
To modify this parameter:

5/4/11

To increase the value, press the up arrow.

To decrease the value, press the down arrow.

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

Operations
Control Panel Parameters

Table 15 Printer Parameters, Password Level 4 (Page 2 of 4)

Parameter

Explanation

PAPER OUT

Adjust Paper Out

Range: 0 to 100
Default Value: 0
To modify this parameter:

PAPER GAIN

To increase the value, press the up arrow.

To decrease the value, press the down arrow.

Adjust Paper Gain

Range: 0 to 255
Default Value: calibrated value
To modify this parameter:

RIBBON OUT

To increase the value, press the up arrow.

To decrease the value, press the down arrow.

Adjust Ribbon-Out Threshold

Range: 0 to 100
Default Value: calibrated value
To modify this parameter:

RIBBON GAIN

To increase the value, press the up arrow.

To decrease the value, press the down arrow.

Adjust the Ribbon Gain Sensor

Range: 0 to 255
Default Value: calibrated value
To modify this parameter:

EDGE SENSOR

To increase the value, press the up arrow.

To decrease the value, press the down arrow.

Enable Edge Sensor

Enables or disables the edge sensor.
Selections: AUTO, DISABLED
Default Value: AUTO
To modify this parameter:

TAKE LABEL

Press the up or down arrow to display other choices.

Adjust the Peel Sensor

This parameter appears only if the Peel option is installed.
Range: 0 to 100
Default Value: 66
To modify this parameter:

13291L-006 Rev. A

To increase the value, press the up arrow.

To decrease the value, press the down arrow.

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Operations
Control Panel Parameters

Table 15 Printer Parameters, Password Level 4 (Page 3 of 4)

Parameter

Explanation

MEDIA POWER UP

Select Media Power-Up Option

This parameter sets the action of the media when you turn on the printer.
Selections: CALIBRATION, LENGTH, SHORT CAL, NO MOTION,
FEED
Default Value: CALIBRATION
Calibrationdetermines the length of the label and adjusts the
sensor settings.
LengthIn continuous mode, feeds the last stored label length. In
noncontinuous mode, calibrates based on the maximum label length
setting (see Set Maximum Label Length on page 82).
Short Calcalibrates label length using the current sensor settings.
No Motionthe media does not move. Press FEED to cause the
printer to resynchronize to the start of the next label.
Feedfeeds the labels to the first registration point.
To modify this parameter:

HEAD CLOSE

Press the up or down arrow to display other choices.

Select Head Close Option

This parameter sets the action of the media when you close the printhead.
Selections: CALIBRATION, LENGTH, SHORT CAL, NO MOTION,
FEED
Default Value: CALIBRATION
Calibrationdetermines the length of the label and adjusts the
sensor settings.
LengthIn continuous mode, feeds the last stored label length. In
noncontinuous mode, calibrates based on the maximum label length
setting (see Set Maximum Label Length on page 82).
Short Calcalibrates label length using the current sensor settings.
No Motionthe media does not move. Press FEED to cause the
printer to resynchronize to the start of the next label.
Feedfeeds the labels to the first registration point.
To modify this parameter:

5/4/11

Press the up or down arrow to display other choices.

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

Operations
Control Panel Parameters

Table 15 Printer Parameters, Password Level 4 (Page 4 of 4)

Parameter

Explanation

LANGUAGE

Select the Display Language

Press the up or down arrow to scroll through the selections.

Manufacturing Menu Parameters

The manufacturing menu is designed to simplify and speed up configuration changes by
providing access to certain parameters from all password levels. For some parameters (such as
DARKNESS or DENSITY), changes are saved immediately. For the remaining parameters,
changes are saved automatically when you exit the manufacturing menu.

To access the manufacturing menu, complete these steps:

1. Turn Off (O) the printer.
2. Press and hold the up arrow.
3. Turn On (I) the printer. Continue holding the up arrow until the printer displays PRINTER

READY.
4. Release the up arrow.
5. Press MENU.

The printer displays the parameters in the manufacturing menu. Table 16 shows
parameters in the order in which they appear when you press the right arrow. Throughout
this process, press the right arrow to continue to the next parameter or the left arrow to
return to the previous parameter in the cycle.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Operations
Control Panel Parameters

6. To exit from the manufacturing menu, press MENU.

The printer saves changes and returns to the PRINTER READY display.
7. To return to normal printer operation, turn the printer Off (O) and then back On (I).

Table 16 Printer Parameters, Manufacturing Menu (Page 1 of 7)

Parameter

Explanation

PRINT OUT

Print Selected Labels

This parameter allows you to print certain types of labels with information
about the printer.
Selections:
SETTINGSPrints a printer configuration label. See Printing
Configuration Labels on page 74.
FONTS (ZPL, EPL, APL-D)Prints a label that lists the available
fonts in the printer, including standard printer fonts plus any
optional fonts. Fonts may be stored in RAM, Flash memory,
optional memory cards, or font cards.
FORMATS (ZPL, EPL, APL-D)Prints a label that lists the
available formats stored in the printers RAM, Flash memory, or
optional memory card.
BARCODES (ZPL only)Prints a label that lists the available bar
codes in the printer.
ALL (ZPL, EPL)Prints labels that list the available fonts, bar
codes, images, formats, and the current printer and network
configurations.
IMAGES (ZPL, EPL, APL-D)Prints a label that lists the images
currently stored in the printers RAM, Flash memory, or optional
memory cards.
NETWORK (ZPL only)Prints a network configuration label. See
Printing Configuration Labels on page 74.
APLI SW SETUP (APL-I only)
APLI HW SETUP (APL-I only)
APLI PRT QUAL (APL-I only)
APLI PITCH (APL-I only)
To print labels:
1. Press the up or down arrow to display label choices.
2. Press ENTER to print the desired label.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

Operations
Control Panel Parameters

Table 16 Printer Parameters, Manufacturing Menu (Page 2 of 7)

Parameter

Explanation

SENSOR PROFILE

Print Sensor Profile

To select this parameter:

1. Press ENTER to start this standard calibration procedure and print a

media sensor profile.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Operations
Control Panel Parameters

Table 16 Printer Parameters, Manufacturing Menu (Page 3 of 7)

Parameter

Explanation

DARKNESS

Adjust Print Darkness

(ZPL, APL-D, and APL-I

modes)

DENSITY
(EPL mode only)

If printing is too light or if there are voids in the printed areas, increase the
darkness. If the printing is too dark or if there is spreading or bleeding of
printed areas, decrease the darkness. Darkness settings also may be
changed by the driver or software settings.
The FEED Self Test on page 130 can be used to determine the best darkness
setting. Because the darkness setting takes effect immediately, you can see
the results on labels that are currently printing.
Range (ZPL, APL-D, APL-I): 0.0 to +30.0
Default Value (ZPL, APL-D, APL-I): +10.0
Range (EPL): 7
Default Value (EPL): 0 to 15
To modify this parameter:

TEAR OFF

Press the up arrow to increase value.

Press the down arrow to decrease value.

Adjust Tear-Off Position

This parameter establishes the position of the labels over the
tear-off/peel-off bar after printing. Each press of a button adjusts the tearoff position by one dot row.
Note The printer applies and saves the tear-off setting
immediately. Exiting Setup mode without saving changes does not
restore the previous value.
Range (ZPL, EPL, APL-I): -120 to +120
Default Value (ZPL, EPL, APL-I): 0
Range (APL-D): +00i to +999i (inches), 0m to 2537m (metric)
Default Value (APL-D): +128i
Note The APL-D default value does not position the label over
the tear-off/peel-off bar. This is done to work with existing DPL
label formats that account for this positioning.
To modify this parameter:

5/4/11

Press the up arrow to increase value.

Press the down arrow to decrease value.

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

Operations
Control Panel Parameters

Table 16 Printer Parameters, Manufacturing Menu (Page 4 of 7)

Parameter

Explanation

MEDIA TYPE

Set Media Type

SENSOR SELECT

Press the up or down arrow to scroll through the selections.

Select the Media Sensor

REMOVAL

Press the up or down arrow to scroll through the selections.

Select the Label Removal Method

13291L-006 Rev. A

Press the up or down arrow to scroll through the selections.

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Operations
Control Panel Parameters

Table 16 Printer Parameters, Manufacturing Menu (Page 5 of 7)

Parameter

Explanation

LENGTH

Set Maximum Label Length

Maximum label length is used in conjunction with the calibration
procedure. The value of this setting is the maximum label length that is
used during the media portion of the calibration process. Only a few labels
are required to set media sensors. Always set the value that is at least 1 in.
(25.4 mm) longer than the longest label to be used on the printer.
Selections: AUTO, < 1 INCH (25.4 mm) to < 39 INCH (991 mm)
Default Value: AUTO
To modify this parameter:

LCD ADJUST

To increase the value, press the up arrow.

To decrease the value, press the down arrow.

Change LCD Darkness

This parameter changes the darkness of characters on the LCD.
Range: 0 to 19
Default Value: 10
To modify this parameter:

5/4/11

To make the characters on the LCD darker, press the up arrow.

To make the characters on the LCD lighter, press the down arrow.

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

100

Operations
Control Panel Parameters

Table 16 Printer Parameters, Manufacturing Menu (Page 6 of 7)

Parameter

Explanation

MEDIA/RIBBON
CALIBRATE

Calibrate Media and Ribbon Sensors

Use this procedure to adjust the sensitivity of the printers sensors. In a
printer that has the Thermal Transfer option installed, both media and
ribbon sensors are adjusted. In a Direct Thermal printer (no Thermal
Transfer option installed), only media sensors are adjusted, and the LCD
displays for ribbon do not appear in this procedure.
Important This procedure must be followed exactly as presented.
All of the steps must be performed even if only one of the sensors
requires adjustment. You may press the left arrow at any step in this
procedure to cancel the procedure.
How to select this parameter:
1. Press ENTER to start the calibration procedure.
The LOAD BACKING/REMOVE RIBBON prompt displays.
1. Open the printhead.
2. Remove approximately 8 in. (203 mm) of labels from the backing, and
pull the media into the printer so that only the backing is between the
media sensors.
3. Remove the ribbon (if used).
4. Press the right arrow to continue.
The message CALIBRATING PLEASE WAIT displays.
The printer adjusts the scale (gain) of the signals that it receives from
the media and ribbon sensors. On the sensor profile, this essentially
corresponds to moving the peak of the graph up or down to optimize the
readings for your application.
RELOAD ALL displays.
1. Reload the media and ribbon (if used).
2. Close the printhead.
3. Press the right arrow to continue.
The message CALIBRATING PLEASE WAIT displays.
The printer does a calibration; during this process, the printer
determines the label length. To see the new readings on the new scale,
print a sensor profile.

(Thermal Transfer only)

MEDIA CALIBRATE
(Direct Thermal only)

TAKE LABEL

Adjust the Peel Sensor

This parameter appears only if the Peel option is installed.
Range: 0 to 100
Default Value: 66
To modify this parameter:

13291L-006 Rev. A

To increase the value, press the up arrow.

To decrease the value, press the down arrow.

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Operations
Control Panel Parameters

Table 16 Printer Parameters, Manufacturing Menu (Page 7 of 7)

Parameter

Explanation

LOAD DEFAULTS

Load Factory Defaults

The printer asks ARE YOU SURE?

1. To load factory defaults, press ENTER to select YES. To cancel, press

any other key.

HEAD OPEN

Show Printhead Status

This menu item provides visual feedback for the adjustment of the head
open sensor. If the printhead is open, OPEN displays. If the printhead is
closed, CLOSED displays. This value cannot be changed through the
control panel.

DIRECT-THERMAL

Select Direct-Thermal Configuration

Direct-Thermal Only mode is a factory configuration setting for printers
that are built without a ribbon handling system. Changing this parameter
from NO to YES changes the printer configuration to Direct-Thermal Only
operation after the printer power is cycled.
Selections:
NOThe printer has a ribbon system and should not operate in
Direct-Thermal Only mode.
YESThe printer does not have a ribbon system and must operate
in Direct-Thermal Only mode.
Default Value: NO
To modify this parameter:
1. Press the up or down arrow to toggle between the selections.
2. If you changed to NO:
a.

Load printer defaults (see Load Factory Defaults on page 88) to

enable the ribbon handling system.

Perform media and ribbon calibration (see Calibrate Media and

Ribbon Sensors on page 90).
3. Turn the printer power Off (O) and then back On (I).
b.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

101

102

Operations
Control Panel Parameters

Notes ___________________________________________________________________

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Data Ports

This section describes the standard communication ports available to connect the printer to
your computer or network.

Contents
Parallel Data Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parallel Cabling Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parallel Port Interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Data Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware Control Signal Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pin Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-232 Interface Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USB 1.1 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

108
108
108
104
104
104
105
110

13291L-006

104

Data Ports
Serial Data Port

Serial Data Port

To communicate using the serial data port of the printer, you must choose the number of data
bits, parity, and handshaking. Parity applies only to data transmitted by the printer because the
parity of received data is ignored.
The values selected must be the same as those used by the host equipment connected to the
printer. Default printer settings are 9600 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, and XON/XOFF. The
printer will accept any host setting for stop bits.

Hardware Control Signal Descriptions

For all RS-232 input and output signals, the printer follows both the Electronics Industries
Association (EIA) RS-232 and the Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and
Telephone (CCITT) V.24 standard signal level specifications.
When DTR/DSR handshaking is selected, the Data Terminal Ready (DTR) control signal
output from the printer controls when the host computer may send data. DTR ACTIVE
(positive voltage) permits the host to send data. When the printer places DTR in the
INACTIVE (negative voltage) state, the host must not send data.
Note When XON/XOFF handshaking is selected, data flow is controlled by the ASCII
Control Codes DC1 (XON) and DC3 (XOFF). The DTR Control lead has no effect.

Request To Send (RTS) is a control signal from the printer that is connected to the Clear To
Send (CTS) input at the host computer.

Pin Configuration
Connect the serial data cable to the female DB-9 connector on the back of the printer. For all
RS-232 connections through a DB-25 cable, use a DB-9 to DB-25 interface module (see DB-9
to DB-25 Connections on page 106).
Table 17 shows the pin configuration of the serial data connector.
Table 17 Serial Connector Pin Configuration

13291L-006 Rev. A

Pin No.

Name

RXD

Receive datadata input to printer

TXD

Transmit datadata output from printer

DTR

Data terminal readyoutput from printer

DSR

Data set readyinput to printer

RTS

Request to sendoutput from printer

Description

Unused and unterminated

Signal ground

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Data Ports
Serial Data Port

Table 17 Serial Connector Pin Configuration (Continued)

Pin No.

Name

CTS

+5 VDC

Description

Clear to sendinput to printer

+5 VDC at 750 mA
The maximum current draw may be limited by option
configuration.
Important To enable this capability, a qualified
service technician must install a jumper on the printers
main logic board on JP1, pins 2 and 3.

RS-232 Interface Connections

The printer is configured as Data Terminal Equipment (DTE). Figure 17 shows the internal
connections of the printers RS-232 connector.
Note Use a null modem (crossover) cable to connect the printer to a computer or any other

DTE device.
Figure 17 RS-232 DB9 MLB Connections

+5VDC

R1
1K

+5VDC signal source

RXD (receive data) input

TXD (transmit data) output

DTR (data terminal ready) output

SG (signal ground)

DSR (data set ready) input

RTS (request to send) output

CTS (clear to send) input

+5VDC signal source

When the printer is connected via its RS-232 interface to Data Communication Equipment
(DCE) such as a modem, use a standard RS-232 (straight-through) interface cable. Figure 18
illustrates the connections required for this cable.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

105

106

Data Ports
Serial Data Port

Figure 18 RS-232 to DCE Cable Connectors

RXD (receive data)

TXD (transmit data)

DTR (data terminal ready)

SG (signal ground)

DSR (data set ready)

RTS (request to send)

CTS (clear to send)

+5 VDC signal source

DB-9 to DB-25 Connections

To connect the printers RS-232 DB-9 interface to a DB-25 connector, an interface adapter is
required. A generic DB-25 adapter can be used, although the +5 VDC signal source would not
be passed through the adapter. Figure 19 shows the connections required for the DB-9 to
DB-25 interface.
Figure 19 DB-9 to DB-25 Cable Connections

RXD

TXD

DTR

RXD

RTS

DSR

CTS

DSR

13291L-006 Rev. A

RTS

CTS

+5 VDC
SIGNAL

S4M Maintenance Manual

+5 VDC
SIGNAL
DTR

9
20

5/4/11

Data Ports
Serial Data Port

Modem Connection
When the printer is connected via its RS-232 interface to Data Communication Equipment
(DCE) such as a modem, use a standard RS-232 (straight-through) interface cable. Figure 20
shows the connections required for this cable.
Figure 20 RS-232 Cable Connections
DTE
(Printer)

2
3
4
5

DCE
(Modem, etc.)
RXD (receive data)
TXD (transmit data)
DTR (data terminal ready)
SG (signal ground)

2
3
4
5

DSR (data set ready)

RTS (request to send)

8
9

CTS (clear to send)

+5 VDC signal source

8
9

NOTE: Pin 1 is unused and unterminated at the printer.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

107

108

Data Ports
Parallel Data Port

Parallel Data Port

The parallel data interface supports IEEE 1284 bidirectional parallel communications in nibble
mode. The parallel interface provides a means of communication that typically is faster than
the serial interface methods. In this method, the bits of data that make up a character are sent
all at one time over several wires in the cable, one bit per wire.
When communicating via the parallel port, the values selected on the printer must be the same
as those used by the host equipment connected to the printer. Port selection for status
information is determined by the channel sending the request. The parallel port can be set for
bidirectional or unidirectional communication. The default setting is bidirectional.

Parallel Cabling Requirements

A standard 36-pin parallel connector is available on the back of the printer for connection to
the data source. An IEEE-1284 compatible bidirectional parallel data cable is required when
this communication method is used. The required cable must have a standard 36-pin parallel
connector on one end that is plugged into the mating connector located at the rear of the
printer. The other end of the cable connects to the printer connector at the host computer. Port
selection for status information is determined each time the printer is turned on.

Parallel Port Interconnections

Table 18 shows the pin configuration and function of a standard computer-to-printer parallel
cable.
Table 18 Parallel Cable Pin Configuration
36-Pin Connectors

nStrobe/HostClk

Data Bits 18

nACK/PtrClk

Busy/PtrBusy

PError/ACKDataReq

Select/Xflag

nAutoFd/HostBusy

Not used

16, 17

Ground

1930

13291L-006 Rev. A

Description

+5 V at 750 mA
The maximum current draw may be limited by option
configuration.
To enable this capability, a qualified service technician
must install a jumper on the printers main logic board on
JP1, pins 2 and 3.
Ground

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Data Ports
Parallel Data Port

Table 18 Parallel Cable Pin Configuration (Continued)

36-Pin Connectors

nInit

nFault/NDataAvail

33, 34

5/4/11

Description

Not used

+5 V through a 1.8 K Resistor

NSelectin/1284 active

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

109

110

Data Ports
USB 1.1 Port

USB 1.1 Port

A USB 1.1 port (which is USB 1.0 compatible) is available to connect your printer to the host
equipment. The industry-standard USB cable has an A-male connector on one end and a
B-male connector on the other end as shown in Figure 21.
Figure 21 USB Connectors
Printer

Computer
1
3

2
1
2
3
4
5

B male connector, attaching to printer

B male connector, detail
A male connector, attaching to computer
A male connector, detail
Maximum cable length = 16.4 ft. (5 m)

Note Use a USB 1.1-certified compliant cable no longer than 16.4 ft (5 m) long. A cable

that meets these requirements is available from Zebra (part number 33011).

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

3
Troubleshooting

This section provides information about LCD, print quality, communications, and other errors
that you might need to troubleshoot. The tables provide symptoms, diagnoses of probable
causes, and recommended actions that should result in proper printer operation. Working with
these tables, the technician can diagnose printer faults and determine the needed repair.

Contents
Troubleshooting Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LCD Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Quality Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous Printer Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power-On Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CANCEL Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAUSE Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FEED Self Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FEED and PAUSE Self Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Diagnostics Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

113
114
118
119
122
123
125
127
127
128
128
130
132
133

13291L-006 Rev. A

112

Troubleshooting
General

General
Consult the troubleshooting tables in this section if you encounter a problem.
If you encounter a problem that you cannot correct with the aid of this manual, contact Zebras
Technical Support immediately to avoid or minimize printer downtime. Technical Support also
can determine if the printer should be returned for repair.
Technical Support via the Internet is available 24 hours per day, 365 days per year. Go to
http://www.zebra.com/support.

The Americas
Regional Headquarters

Technical Support

Customer Service Dept.

Zebra Technologies International,

LLC
333 Corporate Woods Parkway
Vernon Hills, Illinois 60061.3109
U.S.A
T: +1 847 793 2600
Toll-free +1 800 423 0422
F: +1 847 913 8766

T: +1 847 913 2259

F: +1 847 913 2578

For printers, parts, media, and ribbon,

please call your distributor, or
contact us.

Hardware: [email protected]
Software: [email protected]

T: +1 866 230 9494

E: [email protected]

Europe, Africa, Middle East, and India

Regional Headquarters

Technical Support

Internal Sales Dept.

Zebra Technologies Europe Limited

Zebra House
The Valley Centre, Gordon Road
High Wycombe
Buckinghamshire HP13 6EQ, UK

T: +44 (0) 1494 768298

F: +44 (0) 1494 768210
Germany: [email protected]
France: [email protected]
Spain/Portugal: [email protected]
All other areas: [email protected]

For printers, parts, media, and ribbon,

please call your distributor, or
contact us.

Regional Headquarters

Technical Support

Customer Service

Zebra Technologies Asia Pacific, LLC

16 New Industrial Road
#05-03 Hudson TechnoCentre
Singapore 536204

T: +65 6858 0722

F: +65 6885 0838
E: [email protected]

For printers, parts, media, and ribbon,

please call your distributor, or
contact us.

T: +44 (0)1494 472872

F: +44 (0) 1494 450103

T: +44 (0) 1494 768316

F: +44 (0) 1494 768244
E: [email protected]

Asia Pacific

T: +65 6858 0722

F: +65 6885 0838

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

T: +65 6858 0722

F: +65 6885 0837

5/4/11

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Checklists

Troubleshooting Checklists
If an error condition exists with the printer, review this checklist:

Is there an error message on the LCD? If yes, see LCD Error Messages on page 114.
Did you receive a memory error? If yes, see Memory Errors on page 118.
Are noncontinuous labels being treated as continuous labels? If yes, see Calibrate Media
and Ribbon Sensors on page 90.
Is the CHECK RIBBON light on when ribbon is loaded properly? If yes, see Calibrate
Media and Ribbon Sensors on page 90.
Are you experiencing problems with print quality? If yes, see Print Quality Problems
on page 119.
Are you experiencing communications problems? If yes, see Communications Problems
on page 123.
If the labels are not printing or advancing correctly, review this checklist:

Are you using the correct type of labels? Review the types of label in Types of Media
on page 44.
Are you using a label that is narrower than the maximum print width? See Set Print Width
on page 81.
Review the label- and ribbon-loading illustrations in Media Paths on page 38 and Load
Ribbon on page 60.
Does the printhead need to be adjusted? See Adjust Printhead Pressure on page 68 for
more information.
Do the sensors need to be calibrated? See Calibrate Media and Ribbon Sensors
on page 90 for more information.
If none of the above suggestions correct the problem, review this checklist:

Perform one or more of the self-tests given in Printer Diagnostics on page 127. Use the
results to help identify the problem.
If you are still having problems, see Contacts on page 27 for customer support
information.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

113

114

Troubleshooting
LCD Error Messages

LCD Error Messages

The LCD displays messages when there is an error. See Table 19 for LCD errors, the possible
causes, and the recommended solutions.
Table 19 LCD Error Messages
LCD Display/
Printer Condition

The printer stops and the

ALERT
RIBBON OUT
ALERT light flashes.

Possible Cause

Recommended Solution

In thermal transfer mode, ribbon is

not loaded or incorrectly loaded.

Load ribbon correctly.

In thermal transfer mode, the

ribbon sensor is not detecting
ribbon.

In thermal transfer mode, media is

blocking the ribbon sensor.

In thermal transfer mode, the

printer did not detect the ribbon
even though it is loaded correctly.

Load ribbon correctly.

2. Calibrate the sensors. See
Calibrate Media and Ribbon
Sensors on page 90.
Load media correctly.
2. Calibrate the sensors. See
Calibrate Media and Ribbon
Sensors on page 90.
Print a sensor profile. See Print
Sensor Profile on page 89. The
ribbon out threshold (1) is likely
too high, above the black area that
indicates where the ribbon is
detected (2).
1
2

If you are using direct thermal

media, the printer is waiting for
ribbon to be loaded because it is
incorrectly set for thermal transfer
mode.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

Calibrate the sensors or load

printer defaults. See Calibrate
Media and Ribbon Sensors
on page 90 or Load Factory
Defaults on page 88.

Set the printer for Direct Thermal

mode. See Set Ribbon Use on page 88.

5/4/11

Troubleshooting
LCD Error Messages

Table 19 LCD Error Messages (Continued)

LCD Display/
Printer Condition

WARNING
RIBBON IN

Possible Cause

Recommended Solution

Ribbon is loaded, but the printer is

set for direct thermal mode.

Ribbon is not required with direct

thermal media. If you are using direct
thermal media, remove the ribbon. This
error message will not affect printing.

The RIBBON light is on; the

ERROR light flashes. The
ALERT light flashes.

ALERT
PAPER OUT
The printer stops and the
ALERT light flashes.

ALERT
HEAD OPEN

If you are using thermal transfer media,

which requires ribbon, set the printer
for Thermal Transfer mode. See Set
Ribbon Use on page 88
The media is not loaded or is
loaded incorrectly.

Load media correctly.

Misaligned media sensor.

Check position of the media sensor.

The printer is set for

noncontinuous media, but
continuous media is loaded.

Install proper media type, or reset

printer for current media type and
perform calibration.

The printhead is not fully closed.

Close printhead completely.

The head open sensor is not

working properly.

Replace the sensor.

The printhead has a faulty

thermistor.

Replace the printhead.

The printer stops and the

ALERT light flashes.

THERMISTOR
FAULT
The ERROR light flashes.

WARNING
HEAD COLD
THERMISTOR
FAULT

Caution An improperly connected printhead data or power cable

can cause these error messages. The printhead may be hot
enough to cause severe burns. Allow the printhead to cool.

The printhead data cable is not

properly connected.

Turn off (O) the printer.

2. Disconnect and reconnect the data
cable to the printhead.
3. Ensure that the cable connector is
fully inserted into the printhead
connector.
4. Turn on (I) the printer.
1.

ERROR CONDITION
HEAD ELEMENT BAD
The printer stops; the
ERROR light is on; the
printer cycles through these
three messages.
The printhead has a faulty
thermistor.

5/4/11

Caution Turn off (O) the printer

before performing this procedure.
Failure to do so can damage the
printhead.

S4M Maintenance Manual

Replace the printhead.

13291L-006 Rev. A

115

116

Troubleshooting
LCD Error Messages

Table 19 LCD Error Messages (Continued)

LCD Display/
Printer Condition

WARNING
HEAD COLD
The printer prints while the
ALERT light flashes.

Possible Cause

Recommended Solution

Caution An improperly connected printhead data or power cable

can cause this error message. The printhead may be hot enough to
cause severe burns. Allow the printhead to cool.

The printhead temperature is

approaching its lower operating
limit.

The printhead data cable is not

properly connected.

Continue printing while the printhead

reaches the correct operating
temperature. If the error remains, the
environment may be too cold for
proper printing. Relocate the printer to
a warmer area.
Caution Turn off (O) the printer
before performing this procedure.
Failure to do so can damage the
printhead.

Turn off (O) the printer.

2. Disconnect and reconnect the data
cable to the printhead.
3. Ensure that the cable connector is
fully inserted into the printhead
connector.
4. Turn on (I) the printer.
1.

The printhead has a faulty

thermistor.

WARNING
HEAD TOO HOT
The printer stops and the
ALERT light flashes.

13291L-006 Rev. A

Replace the printhead.

Caution The printhead may be hot enough to cause severe

burns. Allow the printhead to cool.

The printhead is over temperature.

S4M Maintenance Manual

Allow the printer to cool. Printing

automatically resumes when the
printhead elements cool to an
acceptable operating temperature.

5/4/11

Troubleshooting
LCD Error Messages

Table 19 LCD Error Messages (Continued)

LCD Display/
Printer Condition

HEAD ELE. BAD

The printer stops.

Possible Cause

Recommended Solution

Caution The printhead may be hot enough to cause severe

burns. Allow the printhead to cool.
Caution Before touching the printhead assembly, discharge any
built-up static electricity by touching the metal printer frame or by
using an anti-static wriststrap and mat.

The printhead is not installed.

The printhead data cable is not
connected.
The printhead is bad.

Caution Turn off (O) the

printer before performing this
procedure. Failure to do so
can damage the printhead.
1.
2.
3.

4.
5.

DEFRAGMENTING

The printer is defragmenting

memory.

Caution Do NOT turn off the printer

power during defragmenting. Doing so
can damage the printer.

Allow the printer to finish

defragmenting. If you get this error
message frequently, check your label
formats. Formats that write to and erase
memory frequently may cause the
printer to defragment often. Using
properly coded label formats usually
minimizes the need for defragmenting.
If this error message does not go away,
contact Technical Support. The printer
requires service.

The printer stops.

5/4/11

Turn off (O) the printer.

Disconnect and reconnect the data
cable to the printhead.
Ensure that the cable connector is
fully inserted into the printhead
connector.
Turn on (I) the printer.
If the problem persists, replace the
printhead.

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

117

118

Troubleshooting
Memory Errors

Memory Errors
The memory errors in Table 20 indicate that the printer does not have enough memory to
perform the function shown on the second line of the LCD.
Table 20 Memory Errors
Problem/LCD Display

Possible Cause

Recommended Solution

OUT OF MEMORY
CREATING BITMAP

Creating Bitmap
The bitmap size (label
length/width) does not fit in
available memory.

OUT OF MEMORY
STORING BITMAP

Storing Bitmap
Not enough memory is
available to store the bitmap
created.

You may do any of the following:

Press PAUSE. Send a ~HM ZPL
command to the printer to display the
amount of free memory. Then redesign
the graphic/format to fit available
memory, or remove items from memory
to create more space.
Press PAUSE to skip the formatting step
in process and proceed to the next step.
With the printer paused, press
CANCEL.
The printer skips the current label
formatting process and goes to the next
label.
Turn the printer off (O) and then on (I)
to clear the printers memory.

OUT OF MEMORY
BUILDING FORMAT
OUT OF MEMORY
STORING FORMAT

Building Format
Label is too complex.
Storing Format
Format is too large to fit in
available memory.

OUT OF MEMORY
STORING GRAPHIC

Storing Graphic
The graphic image is too large
to fit in available memory.

OUT OF MEMORY
STORING FONT

Storing Font
Not enough memory available
to store the font.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Troubleshooting
Print Quality Problems

Print Quality Problems

Table 21 identifies problems with print quality, the possible causes, and the recommended
solutions.
Table 21 Print Quality Problems
Problem

Possible Cause

Recommended Solution

General print quality

issues

The printer is set at the

incorrect print speed.

For optimal print quality, set the print speed to

the lowest possible setting for your application
via control panel, the driver, or the software. See
Adjust Print Speed on page 81. You may want to
perform the FEED Self Test on page 130.

You are using an incorrect

combination of labels and
ribbon for your application.

1. Switch to a different type of media or ribbon

The printer is set at an incorrect

darkness level.

For optimal print quality, set the darkness to the

lowest possible setting for your application via
the control panel, the driver, or the software. See
Adjust Print Darkness on page 78. You may
want to perform the FEED Self Test on page 130
to determine the ideal darkness setting.

The printhead is dirty.

Clean the printhead. See Clean the Printhead

and Platen Roller on page 144.

Incorrect or uneven printhead

pressure.

Set the printhead pressure to the minimum

needed for good print quality.See Adjust
Printhead Pressure on page 68.

The printhead is improperly

balanced.

Adjust the printhead balance.

Print element damaged.

Replace the printhead.

Wrinkled ribbon.

See wrinkled ribbon causes and solutions in this

table.

Long tracks of
missing print on
several labels

5/4/11

to try to find a compatible combination.

2. If necessary, consult your authorized Zebra
reseller or distributor for information and
advice.

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

119

120

Troubleshooting
Print Quality Problems

Table 21 Print Quality Problems (Continued)

Problem

Possible Cause

Recommended Solution

Wrinkled ribbon

Ribbon was fed through the

ribbon system incorrectly.

Load the ribbon correctly. See Load Ribbon

on page 60.

Incorrect burn temperature.

Set the darkness to the lowest possible setting for

good print quality. See Adjust Print Darkness
on page 78.

Incorrect or uneven printhead

pressure.

Set the printhead pressure to the minimum

needed for good print quality. See Adjust
Printhead Pressure on page 68.

Media not feeding properly;

walking from side to side.

Make sure that media is snug by adjusting the

media guide, or call a service technician.

The printhead is improperly

balanced.

Adjust the printhead balance.

Fine, angular gray

lines on blank labels

Wrinkled ribbon.

See wrinkled ribbon causes and solutions in this

table.

Printing too light or

too dark over the
entire label

The media or ribbon is not

designed for high-speed
operation.

Replace supplies with those recommended for

high-speed operation.

You are using an incorrect

combination of media and
ribbon for your application.

1. Switch to a different type of media or ribbon

You are using ribbon with

direct thermal media.

Direct thermal media does not require ribbon. To

check if you are using direct thermal media,
perform the label scratch test in When to Use
Ribbon on page 45.

Incorrect or uneven printhead

pressure.

Set the pressure to the minimum needed. See

Adjust Printhead Pressure on page 68.

Smudge marks on
labels

The media or ribbon is not

designed for high-speed
operation.

Replace supplies with those recommended for

high-speed operation.

Misregistration/skips
labels

The printer is not calibrated.

Recalibrate the printer.

Improper label format.

Use correct label format.

Misregistration and
misprint of one to
three labels

The platen roller is dirty.

See Clean the Printhead and Platen Roller

on page 144.

Media does not meet

specifications.

Use media that meets specifications.

13291L-006 Rev. A

to try to find a compatible combination.

2. If necessary, consult your authorized Zebra
reseller or distributor for information and
advice.

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Troubleshooting
Print Quality Problems

Table 21 Print Quality Problems (Continued)

Problem

Possible Cause

Vertical drift in
top-of-form position

The printer is out of calibration. Calibrate the printer.

Vertical image or
label drift

The bar code printed

on a label does not
scan.

5/4/11

Recommended Solution

Calibrate the printer. See Calibrate Media

and Ribbon Sensors on page 90.
2. Adjust the label top position setting. See
Adjust Label Top Position on page 79.

Normal tolerances of
mechanical parts and printer
modes.
Note A vertical drift of
4 to 6 dot rows
(approximately 0.5 mm)
is within normal
tolerances.

The platen roller is dirty.

Clean the platen roller. See Clean the Printhead

and Platen Roller on page 144.

The printer is using

Configure the printer for non-continuous and run
non-continuous labels but is
calibration routine, if necessary.
configured in continuous mode.
The media sensor is calibrated
improperly.

See Calibrate Media and Ribbon Sensors

on page 90.

The platen roller is dirty.

Clean the platen roller. See Clean the Printhead

and Platen Roller on page 144.

Improper printhead pressure

settings (toggles).

Adjust the printhead pressure to ensure proper

functionality.

Improperly loaded ribbon or

media.

Verify that the printer is loaded properly.

Incompatible media.

Ensure that the interlabel gaps or notches are 2 to

4 mm and consistently placed. Media must not
exceed minimum specifications for mode of
operation.

The bar code is not within

specifications because the print
is too light or too dark.

Perform the FEED Self Test on page 130. Adjust

the darkness or print speed settings as necessary.

Not enough blank space around

the bar code.

Leave at least 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) between the bar

code and other printed areas on the label and
between the bar code and the edge of the label.

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

121

122

Troubleshooting
Calibration Problems

Calibration Problems
Table 22 identifies problems with calibration, the possible causes, and the recommended
solutions.
Table 22 Calibration Problems
Problem

Possible Cause

Recommended Solution

Loss of printing
registration on labels.
Excessive vertical
drift in top-of-form
registration.

The platen roller is dirty.

Clean the platen roller according to the

instructions in Clean the Printhead and Platen
Roller on page 144.

Media guides are positioned

improperly.

Ensure that the media guides are properly

positioned.

The media type is set

incorrectly.

Set the printer for the correct media type

(gap/notch, continuous, or mark). See Set Media
Type on page 80.

An incorrect sensor is being

used for the media type.

Manually select the correct sensor to use. See

Select the Media Sensor on page 80.

Auto Calibrate failed. Media or ribbon is loaded

incorrectly.

13291L-006 Rev. A

Ensure that media and ribbon are loaded

correctly.

The sensors could not detect the

media or ribbon.

Manually calibrate the printer. See Calibrate

Media and Ribbon Sensors on page 90.

The sensors are dirty, or media

is positioned improperly for the
sensors to detect.

Ensure that the sensors are clean and that media

is positioned properly.

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Troubleshooting
Communications Problems

Communications Problems
Table 23 identifies problems with communications, the possible causes, and the recommended
solutions.
Table 23 Communications Problems
Problem

Possible Cause

Recommended Solution

A label format was sent to

the printer but was not
recognized.

The communication
parameters are incorrect.

Check the printer driver or software

communications settings (if applicable).
If you are using serial communication, make
sure that you are using a null modem cable or a
null modem adapter.
If a driver is used, check the driver
communication settings for your connection.

A label format was sent to

the printer. Several labels
print, then the printer
skips, misplaces, misses, or
distorts the image on the
label.

The serial communication

settings are incorrect.

A label format was sent to

the printer but was not
recognized. No printing
occurs.

The prefix and delimiter

characters set in the printer
do not match the ones in the
label format.

Verify the prefix and delimiter characters. See

Set Command Character on page 86 and Set
Delimiter Character on page 86 for the
requirements.

Incorrect data is being sent

to the printer.

Check the communication settings on the

computer. Ensure that they match the printer
settings.

Ensure that the flow control settings match.

Check the communication cable length. See
Table 5 on page 42 for requirements.
Check the printer driver or software
communications settings (if applicable).

Ensure that the label format being used

matches the operating language of the printer.
See Printer Language Modes on page 36.
If the problem continues, check the label
format.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

123

124

Troubleshooting
Ribbon Problems

Ribbon Problems
Table 24 identifies problems that may occur with ribbon, the possible causes, and the
recommended solutions.
Note This section applies only to printers that have the Thermal Transfer option installed.

Table 24 Ribbon Problems

Problem

Possible Cause

Recommended Solution

Broken or melted
ribbon

Darkness setting too high.

The ribbon is coated on the

wrong side and cannot be used
in this printer.

Replace the ribbon with one coated on the

correct side. For more information, see Coated
Side of Ribbon on page 45.

The ribbon-out threshold is set

too high to detect the ribbon.
On a sensor profile, the
ribbon-out threshold (circled in
Figure 22) appears above the
black bars that indicate the
ribbon. This happens if you
calibrate the printer without
ribbon and later insert ribbon
without recalibrating the printer
or loading printer defaults.

The printer does not

detect when the
ribbon runs out.
When the RIBBON
parameter is set to
YES, the printer
remains in direct
thermal mode (shown
on the printer
configuration label),
even though ribbon is
loaded correctly in
the printer.

The printer indicates

that ribbon is out,
even though ribbon is
loaded correctly.

13291L-006 Rev. A

Figure 22 Ribbon-Out
Threshold Too High

The printer was not calibrated

for the label and ribbon being
used.

Reduce the darkness setting.

2. Clean the printhead thoroughly.

Print a sensor profile (see Print Sensor

Profile on page 89), and note the location of
the ribbon-out threshold (circled in
Figure 22).
2. Calibrate the printer, this time using ribbon,
or load printer defaults. See Calibrate Media
and Ribbon Sensors on page 90 or Load
Factory Defaults on page 88.
Important Loading defaults resets
all printer parameters back to factory
defaults.
3. Print another sensor profile, and compare it
to the first one.
4. If the ribbon-out threshold is still too high,
you may manually change the value. See
Adjust Ribbon-Out Threshold on page 92.

Perform the calibration procedure in Calibrate

Media and Ribbon Sensors on page 90.

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Troubleshooting
Miscellaneous Printer Problems

Miscellaneous Printer Problems

Table 25 identifies miscellaneous problems with the printer, the possible causes, and the
recommended solutions.
Table 25 Miscellaneous Printer Problems
Problem

Possible Cause

Recommended Solution

The LCD displays a

language that I
cannot read

The language parameter was

changed through the control
panel or a firmware command.

Perform the procedure in Select a Display

Language on page 77.

The LCD is missing

characters or parts of
characters

The LCD may need replacing.

Run the Power-On Self Test on page 127 and

check that the LCD display shows all characters.
If not, replace the LCD.

Changes in
parameter settings
did not take effect

Parameters are set incorrectly.

A firmware command turned

off the ability to change the
parameter.

Refer to the Programming Guide for the printer

language being used.

A firmware command changed

the parameter back to the
previous setting.

Refer to the Programming Guide for the printer

language being used.

If the problem continues, there

may be a problem with the
main logic board.

Replace the main logic board.

If you turn on the printer with

the peel assembly open, the
printer does not recognize the
take-label sensor. The printer
cannot operate in Peel-Off
mode until it recognizes this
sensor.

The printer stayed in

Tear-Off mode when
I switched to Peel-Off
mode.

5/4/11

Set parameters and save permanently.

2. Turn the printer off (O) and then on (I).

Close the peel assembly.

2. Make sure that no labels extend past the
peel-off/tear-off bar.
3. Use the control panel to set the printer to
Peel-Off mode, and save the changes.
4. Turn the printer power off (O) and then
on (I).

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

125

126

Troubleshooting
Miscellaneous Printer Problems

Table 25 Miscellaneous Printer Problems (Continued)

Problem

Possible Cause

Recommended Solution

The printer fails to

calibrate or detect the
top of the label.

The printer was not calibrated

for the label being used.

Perform the calibration procedure in Calibrate

Media and Ribbon Sensors on page 90.

The printer is configured for

continuous media.

Set the media type to noncontinuous media. See

Set Media Type on page 80.

The driver or software

configuration is not set
correctly.

Driver or software settings produce commands

that can overwrite the printer configuration.
Check the driver or software media-related
setting.

The printer was not calibrated

for the media being used.

Perform the calibration procedure in Calibrate

Media and Ribbon Sensors on page 90.

The printer is configured for

continuous media.

Set the media type to noncontinuous media. See

Set Media Type on page 80.

All lights are on, but

nothing displays on
the LCD, and the
printer locks up.

Internal electronic or firmware

failure.

Turn the printer power off (O) and then on (I). If

the printer locks up again, replace the main logic
board.

The printer locks up

while running the
Power-On Self Test.

Main logic board failure.

Replace the main logic board.

Non-continuous
labels are being
treated as continuous
labels.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Troubleshooting
Printer Diagnostics

Printer Diagnostics
Self tests and other diagnostics provide specific information about the condition of the printer.
The self tests produce sample printouts and provide specific information that helps determine
the operating conditions for the printer. The most commonly used are the Power-On and the
CANCEL self tests.
Important Use full-width media when performing self tests. If your media is not wide
enough, the test labels may print on the platen roller.

Each self test is enabled by pressing a specific control panel key or combination of keys while
turning on (I) the printer power. Keep the key(s) pressed until the first indicator light turns off.
The selected self test automatically starts at the end of the Power-On Self Test.
Note

When performing these self tests, do not send data to the printer from the host.
If your media is shorter than the label to be printed, the test label continues on the next
label.
When canceling a self test prior to its actual completion, always reset the printer by
turning it off (O) and then on (l).

Power-On Self Test

A Power-On Self Test (POST) is performed each time the printer is turned on (l). During this
test, the control panel lights (LEDs) turn on and off to ensure proper operation. At the end of
this self test, only the POWER LED remains lit. When the Power-On Self Test is complete, the
media is advanced to the proper position.

To initiate the Power-On Self Test, complete these steps:

1. Turn on (I) the printer.

The POWER LED illuminates. The other control panel LEDs and the LCD monitor the
progress and indicate the results of the individual tests. All messages during the POST
display in English; however, if the test fails, the resulting messages cycle through the
international languages as well.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

127

128

Troubleshooting
Printer Diagnostics

CANCEL Self Test

The CANCEL self test prints a configuration label (Figure 23).

To perform the CANCEL Self Test, complete these steps:

1. Turn off (O) the printer.
2. Press and hold CANCEL while turning on (I) the printer. Hold CANCEL until the first

control panel light turns off.

A printer configuration label prints (Figure 23).
Figure 23 Sample Configuration Label

PAUSE Self Test

This self test can be used to provide the test labels required when making adjustments to the
printers mechanical assemblies or to determine if any printhead elements are not working.
Figure 24 shows a sample printout.

To perform a PAUSE self test, complete these steps:

1. Turn off (O) the printer.
2. Press and hold PAUSE while turning on (I) the printer. Hold PAUSE until the first control

panel light turns off.

The initial self test prints 15 labels at the printers slowest speed, and then
automatically pauses the printer. Each time PAUSE is pressed, an additional 15 labels
print. Figure 24 shows a sample of the labels.
Figure 24 PAUSE Test Label

13291L-006 Rev. A

While the printer is paused, pressing CANCEL alters the self test. Each time PAUSE is
pressed, 15 labels print at 6 in. (152 mm) per second.

While the printer is paused, pressing CANCEL again alters the self test a second time.
Each time PAUSE is pressed, 50 labels print at the printers slowest speed

While the printer is paused, pressing CANCEL again alters the self test a third time.
Each time PAUSE is pressed, 50 labels print at 6 in. (152 mm) per second.

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Troubleshooting
Printer Diagnostics

5/4/11

While the printer is paused, pressing CANCEL again alters the self test a fourth time.
Each time PAUSE is pressed, 15 labels print at the printers maximum speed.

To exit this self test at any time, press and hold CANCEL.

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

129

130

Troubleshooting
Printer Diagnostics

FEED Self Test

Different types of media may require different darkness settings. This section contains a
simple but effective method for determining the ideal darkness for printing bar codes that are
within specifications.
During the FEED self test, labels are printed at different darkness settings at two different print
speeds. The relative darkness and the print speed are printed on each label. The bar codes on
these labels may be ANSI-graded to check print quality.
The darkness value starts at three settings lower than the printers current darkness value
(relative darkness of 3) and increase until the darkness is three settings higher than the current
darkness value (relative darkness of +3).

To perform a FEED self test, complete these steps:

1. Print a configuration label to show the printers current settings.
2. Turn off (O) the printer.
3. Press and hold FEED while turning on (I) the printer. Hold FEED until the first control

panel light turns off.

The printer prints a series of labels (Figure 25) at various speeds and at darkness settings
higher and lower than the darkness value shown on the configuration label.
Figure 25 FEED Test Label

4. See Figure 26 and Table 26. Inspect the test labels and determine which one has the best

print quality for your application. If you have a bar code verifier, use it to measure
bars/spaces and calculate the print contrast. If you do not have a bar code verifier, use your
eyes or the system scanner to choose the optimal darkness setting based on the labels
printed in this self test.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Troubleshooting
Printer Diagnostics

Figure 26 Bar Code Darkness Comparison

Table 26 Judging Bar Code Quality

5/4/11

Print Quality

Description

Too dark

Labels that are too dark are fairly obvious. They may be
readable but not in-spec.
The normal bar code bars increase in size.
The openings in small alphanumeric characters may fill in
with ink.
Rotated bar code bars and spaces run together.

Slightly dark

Slightly dark labels are not as obvious.

The normal bar code will be in-spec.
Small character alpha numerics will be bold and could be
slightly filled in.
The rotated bar code spaces are small when compared to
the in-spec code, possibly making the code unreadable.

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

131

132

Troubleshooting
Printer Diagnostics

Table 26 Judging Bar Code Quality (Continued)

Print Quality

Description

In-spec

The in-spec bar code can only be confirmed by a verifier,

but it should exhibit some visible characteristics.
The normal bar code will have complete, even bars and
clear, distinct spaces.
The rotated bar code will have complete, even bars and
clear, distinct spaces. Although it may not look as good as
a slightly dark bar code, the bar code will be in-spec.
In both normal and rotated styles, small alphanumeric
characters look complete.

Slightly light

Slightly light labels are, in some cases, preferred to slightly

dark ones for in-spec bar codes.
Both normal and rotated bar codes will be in spec, but
small alphanumeric characters may not be complete.

Too light

Labels that are too light are obvious.

Both normal and rotated bar codes have incomplete bars
and spaces.
Small alphanumeric characters are unreadable.

5. Note the relative darkness value and the print speed printed on the best test label.
6. Add or subtract the relative darkness value from the darkness value specified on the

configuration label. The resulting numeric value (0 to 30) is the best darkness value for
that specific label/ribbon combination and print speed.
7. If necessary, change the darkness value to the darkness value on the best test label. See

Adjust Print Darkness on page 78.

8. If necessary, change the print speed to the same speed as on the best test label. See Adjust

Print Speed on page 81.

FEED and PAUSE Self Test

Performing this self test temporarily resets the printer configuration to the factory default
values. These values are active only until power is turned off unless you save them
permanently in memory. If the factory default values are permanently saved, a media
calibration procedure must be performed.

To perform a FEED and PAUSE self test, complete these steps:

1. Turn off (O) the printer.
2. Press and hold FEED and PAUSE while turning on (I) the printer.
3. Hold FEED and PAUSE until the first control panel light turns off.

The printer configuration is temporarily reset to the factory default values. No labels print
at the end of this test.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Troubleshooting
Printer Diagnostics

Communications Diagnostics Test

The communication diagnostics test is a troubleshooting tool for checking the interconnection
between the printer and the host computer.
When the printer is in diagnostics (hex dump) mode, it prints all data received from the host
computer as straight ASCII characters with the hex values below the ASCII text. The printer
prints all characters received, including control codes such as CR (carriage return). Figure 27
shows a typical test label from this test.
Note The test label prints upside-down.

Figure 27 Communications Diagnostics Test Label

To use communications diagnostics mode, complete these steps:

1. Set the print width equal to or less than the label width being used for the test. See Set

Print Width on page 81 for more information.

2. Set Hex Dump mode to YES. For instructions, see Hex Dump on page 87.

The printer enters diagnostics mode and prints any data received from the host computer
on a test label
3. Check the test label for error codes. For any errors, check that your communication

parameters are correct.

Errors show on the test label as follows:

FE indicates a framing error.

OE indicates an overrun error.

PE indicates a parity error.

NE indicates noise.

4. Turn the printer off (O) and then back on (I) to exit this self test and return to normal

operation.

Sensor Profile
Use the sensor profile label to troubleshoot the following types of problems:
5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

133

134

Troubleshooting
Printer Diagnostics

If the media sensor experiences difficulty in determining gaps (web) between labels.
If the media sensor incorrectly identifies preprinted areas on a label as gaps (web).
For instructions on printing a sensor profile, see Print Sensor Profile on page 89. If the
sensitivity of the sensors must be adjusted, perform Calibrate Media and Ribbon Sensors
on page 90.
Note The ribbon portion of the label appears only for printers that have the Thermal

13291L-006 Rev. A

138

Maintenance
Personal Safety Tips

Personal Safety Tips

Caution Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type, or in the wrong
polarity.

Caution For personnel and equipment safety, always use an approved three-conductor
power cord specific to the region or country intended for installation. This cord must use
an IEC 320 female connector and the appropriate region-specific, three-conductor
grounded plug configuration.

Caution Beware of pinch points on the printers, especially:

Opening and closing the covers

Opening and closing the printhead

Rewind spindle

Platen roller

Peel assembly

Caution Wear protective eyewear when installing or removing E-rings, C-clips, snap
rings, springs, and mounting buttons. These are under tension and could fly off.

Important Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry such as rings, watches, or bracelets when
servicing the printers.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Maintenance
Equipment Safety Tips

Equipment Safety Tips

The AC power plug and IEC 320 connectors on all Zebra Printers must bear the
certification mark of at least one of the international safety organizations listed below.

Caution Turn Off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing any maintenance.

Caution Observe proper electrostatic safety precautions when handling any

static-sensitive components such as circuit boards and printheads.

Caution Permanent damage to the Flash Memory will result if you turn on power to the
print engine with Flash Memory chips installed in the wrong direction.

5/4/11

Zebra printers comply with international regulations governing radiated emissions when
using fully shielded data cables. Data cables must be fully shielded and fitted with metal
or metallized connector shells. Required shielded data cables and connectors prevent
radiation and reception of electrical noise. Use of unshielded data cables may increase
radiated emissions above the regulated limits.
Zebra recommends using Preventive Maintenance Kit (p/n 47362), or a solvent containing
90% isopropyl alcohol and 10% distilled water. Increase the percentage of alcohol as
necessary for effective cleaning of:
printheads
platen rollers
peel-off rollers
pinch rollers
media paths
peel/tear bars
spindles
Ribbons used in the printers must be as wide as or wider than the media. If the ribbon is
narrower than the media, areas of the printhead will be unprotected and subject to
premature wear.
To ensure the printer has proper ventilation and cooling, do not place any padding or
cushioning material under the unit because this restricts airflow.
Install the printer on a solid, level surface of sufficient size and strength to accommodate
the physical dimensions and weight of the unit. The area enclosure in which the printer
will operate must meet the environmental conditions specified in the Maintenance Manual
or User Guide. Electrical power must be available and in close proximity to the printer.

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

139

140

Maintenance
Equipment Safety Tips

Notes ___________________________________________________________________

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Preventive Maintenance

This section contains procedures for routine preventive maintenance. An operator or

technician may perform preventive maintenance, which consists of:
Visual inspection
Regular cleaning of the printhead, platen roller, peel roller, and pinch roller
General cleaning of the print engines interior and exterior

Contents
Cleaning Schedule and Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clean the Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clean the Printhead and Platen Roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clean the Media Compartment and Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clean the Peel Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

143
143
144
146
147

13291L-006 Rev. A

142

Preventive Maintenance
Preventive MaintenancePreventive Maintenance

Preventive Maintenance
Preventive maintenance consists of:
Visual inspection
Regular cleaning of the printhead and platen roller
General cleaning of the printers interior and exterior
An operator or technician may perform preventive maintenance. See Table 27 on page 143
for the preventive maintenance chart).

Tools Required for Preventive Maintenance

Isopropyl alcohol (Use Zebras Preventive Maintenance Kit, Zebra part number 47362 or
a solution of 90% isopropyl alcohol and 10% deionized water.)
Cotton swabs
Lint free cloth
Citrus Cleaner (GooGone)

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Preventive Maintenance
Cleaning Schedule and Procedures

Cleaning Schedule and Procedures

Important Zebra is not responsible for damage caused by the use of cleaning fluids on this

printer.
Specific cleaning procedures are provided on the following pages. Table 27 shows the
recommended cleaning schedule. These intervals are intended as guidelines only. You may
have to clean more often, depending upon your application and media.
.

Table 27 Recommended Cleaning Schedule

Area

Method

Interval

Printhead

Solvent*

Platen roller

Solvent*

Media sensors

Air blow

Direct Thermal Mode: After every roll of

media (or 500 feet of fanfold media).
Thermal Transfer Mode: After every roll of
ribbon or three rolls of media.

Ribbon sensor

Air blow

Media path

Solvent*

Ribbon path

Solvent*

Tear-off/peel-off bar

Solvent*

Once a month.

Take-label sensor

Air blow

Once every six months.

* Zebra recommends using Preventive Maintenance Kit (part number 47362). In place of this kit, you may use a clean swab
dipped in a solution of isopropyl alcohol (minimum 90%) and deionized water (maximum 10%).

Clean the Exterior

You may clean the exterior surfaces of the printer with a lint-free cloth and a small amount of a
mild detergent, if necessary. Do not use harsh or abrasive cleaning agents or solvents.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

143

144

Preventive Maintenance
Cleaning Procedures

Clean the Printhead and Platen Roller

You can minimize printhead wear and maintain print quality with regular preventive measures.
Over time, the movement of media or ribbon across the printhead wears through the protective
ceramic coating, exposing and eventually damaging the print elements (dots). To avoid
abrasion:
Clean the printhead frequently, and use well-lubricated thermal transfer ribbons with
backings optimized to reduce friction.
Minimize printhead pressure and burn temperature settings by optimizing the balance
between the two.
Ensure that the thermal transfer ribbon is as wide or wider than the label media to prevent
exposing the elements to the more abrasive label material.
For best results, clean the printhead after changing every roll of ribbon. Inconsistent print
quality, such as voids in the bar code or graphics, may indicate a dirty printhead.
-

Note For printers with a peel assembly, keep the peel assembly closed while cleaning the
platen roller to reduce the risk of bending the tear-off/peel-off bar.

Figure 30 Location of the Printhead and Platen Roller

1
2

Printhead assembly
Platen roller

Caution The printhead may be hot and could cause severe burns. Allow the printhead
to cool.

Caution Before touching the printhead assembly, discharge any built-up static electricity
by touching the metal printer frame or by using an antistatic wriststrap and mat.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Preventive Maintenance
Cleaning Procedures

To clean the printhead and platen roller, complete these steps:

1. Open the printhead assembly.
2. Remove the media and ribbon.
3. Using the swab from the Preventive Maintenance Kit (part number 47362), wipe along the

brown strip on the printhead assembly from end to end. In place of the Preventive
Maintenance Kit, you may use a clean swab dipped in a solution of isopropyl alcohol
(minimum 90%) and deionized water (maximum 10%). Allow the solvent to evaporate.

4. While manually rotating the platen roller, clean it thoroughly with the swab. Allow the

solvent to evaporate.

5. Reload media and ribbon, and close the printhead assembly.

Note If performing this procedure does not improve print quality, try cleaning the

printhead with Save-A-Printhead cleaning film. This specially coated material removes
contamination buildup without damaging the printhead. Call your authorized Zebra
reseller for more information.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

145

146

Preventive Maintenance
Cleaning Procedures

Clean the Media Compartment and Sensors

To clean the media compartment and sensors, complete these steps:
1. Brush or vacuum any accumulated paper lint and dust away from the media and ribbon

paths.
2. Brush or vacuum any paper lint and dust away from the sensors (see Figure 31).

Figure 31 Cleaning the Sensors

2
3
1
4

1
2
3
4

13291L-006 Rev. A

Take-label sensor
Ribbon sensor
Transmissive sensor
Reflective sensor

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Preventive Maintenance
Cleaning Procedures

Clean the Peel Assembly

The peel assembly, which is part of the Peel-Off option, consists of several spring-loaded
rollers to ensure the proper roller pressure. Clean the pinch roller and tear-off/peel-off bar if
adhesive buildup begins to affect peel performance.
Caution Do not use your left hand to assist in closing the Peel assembly. The top edge of
the Peel roller/assembly could pinch your fingers.

Caution The printhead may be hot and could cause severe burns. Allow the printhead to
cool.

If adhesive buildup affects peel-off performance, complete these steps:

1. Press the printhead release latch to open the printhead assembly. Lift the printhead until it

latches open.

2. Push down the peel-off mechanism release lever to open the peel assembly.

3. Remove any media backing to expose the pinch roller.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

147

148

Preventive Maintenance
Cleaning Procedures

4. While manually rotating the pinch roller, clean it thoroughly with the swab from the

Preventive Maintenance Kit (part number 47362). In place of the Preventive Maintenance
Kit, you may use a clean swab dipped in a solution of isopropyl alcohol (minimum 90%)
and deionized water (maximum 10%). Allow the solvent to evaporate.

5. Use the swab to remove excess adhesive from the tear-off/peel-off bar. Allow the solvent

to evaporate.
Important Apply minimum force when cleaning the tear-off/peel-off bar. Excessive
force can cause the tear-off/peel-off bar to bend, which could have a negative effect on
peel performance.

6. Close the printhead assembly.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Preventive Maintenance
Cleaning Procedures

Caution Use the peel release lever and your right hand to close the peel assembly.
Do not use your left hand to assist in closing. The top edge of the peel roller/assembly
could pinch your fingers.

Close the peel assembly using the peel-off mechanism release lever.

8. Close the media door.

The printer is ready to operate.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

149

150

Preventive Maintenance
Cleaning Procedures

Notes ___________________________________________________________________

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance

Corrective maintenance consists of the following:

Troubleshooting printer faults to a modular level.
Replacing or adjusting faulty or inoperable components.
Returning the printer to proper operating condition.

Contents\
Routine Referral Procedures (RRP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove the Electronics Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install the Electronics Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roller System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printed Circuit Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

153
154
156
157
225
257
355
375
451

13291L-006

152

Corrective Maintenance
Tools Required

Tools Required
Safety Glasses
Standard screwdriver set
Phillips screwdriver set
Metric hex key (allen wrench) set
Standard hex key (allen wrench) set
Metric nut driver set
Standard nut driver set
Long needle nose pliers
Four Inch (100 mm) Adjustable (Crescent) Wrench
Antistatic wrist strap and mat
Isopropyl Alcohol; Zebras Preventive Maintenance Kit, part number 47362 or a solution
of 90% alcohol/10% de-ionized water
Cotton swabs and lint free cloths
0.060 inch feeler gauge or shim
Punch set

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Routine Referral Procedures

(RRP)

Routine Referral Procedures are commonly used steps that are performed often during
corrective maintenance. These procedures are referenced throughout this section of the
manual.

Contents
Remove the Electronics Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Install the Electronics Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

154

Corrective Maintenance
Routine Referral Procedures

RRP No. 1: Remove the Electronics Cover

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1.

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.
2.

Caution While performing any tasks near an open printhead, remove all rings,
watches, hanging necklaces, identification badges, or other metallic objects that could
touch the printhead.

Remove the media and ribbon.

3. See Figure 32. Remove the electronics cover mounting screw and washer, and then close

the media door.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Routine Referral Procedures

Figure 32 Remove the Mounting Screw

2
3

1
2
3
4

Media door
Electronics cover upper flange
Electronics cover mounting screw
Washer

4. See Figure 33. Remove the four remaining mounting screws securing the electronics

cover.
5. Remove the electronics cover by lifting straight up on the bottom lip of the electronics

cover.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

155

156

Corrective Maintenance
Routine Referral Procedures

Figure 33 Remove the Electronics Cover

1
2

Electronics cover
Mounting screws (4)

RRP No. 2: Install the Electronics Cover

1. See Figure 33 on page 156. Install the cover by aligning it and sliding down, ensuring the

lower tabs are inside the base and the upper flanges are between the main frame and the
media door.
2. Install the four mounting screws on the back of the printer.
3. See Figure 32 on page 155. Open the media door and install the mounting screw and

washer to secure the electronics cover.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Print System

This section provides replacement, conversion, and installation procedures for the S4M print
system.

Contents
Printhead Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printhead Upgrade Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printhead Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Latch Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printhead Pressure Dials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

158
164
178
192
208
217

13291L-006 Rev. A

158

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead AssemblyPrinthead Assembly

Printhead Assembly
Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Phillips Screwdriver Set

47362* Zebra Preventive Maintenance Kit

Antistatic Wriststrap and Mat

Metric Nutdriver Set

* In place of the Preventive Maintenance Kit, you may use clean swabs and a solution containing
isopropyl alcohol ( 90%) with deionized water (10%).

Remove the Printhead

Caution Observe proper electrostatic safety precautions when handling

static-sensitive components such as circuit boards and printheads.

Connect yourself to an antistatic device.

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.
3.

Caution While performing any tasks near an open printhead, remove all rings,
watches, hanging necklaces, identification badges, or other metallic objects that could
touch the printhead.

Open the media door and remove media and ribbon.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead AssemblyPrinthead Assembly

4. See Figure 34. Note the current printhead pressure dial settings, and then rotate the two

printhead pressure dials to position #1.

Figure 34 Printhead Pressure Knobs
1

4
Front of Printer
1
2
3
4

5/4/11

Position #1
Position #4
Thumbscrew
Printhead pressure
dials (2)

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

159

160

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead AssemblyPrinthead Assembly

5. See Figure 35. Remove the printhead thumbscrew.

Caution The printhead may be hot and could cause severe burns. Allow the
printhead to cool.

Unlatch the print mechanism and lift and latch it in the open position.
Figure 35 Printhead Assembly Mounting and Connections
1
2

3
7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Thumbscrew
Printhead pressure dials (2)
Print mechanism assembly
Printhead connectors (2)
Printhead fork assembly
Locating holes (2)
Ribbon guide plate

7. Slide the printhead fork assembly out of the print mechanism.

8. With the cable connectors exposed, carefully disconnect the two printhead cables from the

printhead assembly. Remove and discard the old printhead assembly.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead AssemblyPrinthead Assembly

Install the New Printhead

Caution An improperly connected printhead data or power cable may cause the
printhead to generate excessive heat and/or a false HEAD COLD message to display
while the printhead is hot enough to cause severe burns.

Connect the printhead cables to the new printhead fork assembly and then carefully slide
the assembly into the print mechanism.
Important When mounting the printhead fork assembly onto the print mechanism,
visually inspect and ensure the following:
the cables are in their channels at the back of their carrier assembly
the power cable is under data cable
they are not binding on the print mechanism

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

161

162

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead AssemblyPrinthead Assembly

2. See Figure 36 on page 162. Tip the printhead fork assembly slightly and insert the

printhead ribbon guide into the print mechanism as shown.

3. Tip the printhead fork assembly up and into the print mechanism ensuring that the two

locating protrusions on either side of the ribbon guide plate snap into the locating holes of
the printhead. Move the assembly back and forth to be sure that it is engaged; there should
be little movement.
4. Hold the printhead in place and install the thumb screw to secure the fork assembly.

Figure 36 Install the Printhead Fork Assembly

1
2
3

Thumbscrew
Print mechanism
Printhead fork assembly

5. See Figure 34 on page 159. Rotate the two printhead pressure dials to the desired position

for your daily printing.

Caution Do not use sharp objects to clean the printhead or platen roller.

Clean the printhead and platen roller using Zebra Preventive Maintenance Kit (47362).

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead AssemblyPrinthead Assembly

Caution When you are loading media or ribbon, remove all jewelry that could come
into contact with the printhead or other printer parts.

Reinstall the media and ribbon.

8. Reconnect the AC power cord and data cables.
9. Turn on (l) the printer.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

163

164

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Upgrade OptionPrinthead Upgrade Option

Printhead Upgrade Option

Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Phillips Screwdriver Set

Antistatic Wriststrap and Mat

Metric Nutdriver Set

Metric and inch Feeler Gauges; must

include: 0.060 in. (1.5mm)

47362* Zebra Preventive Maintenance

Kit

Metric Hex Key (Allen wrench) Set

*. A solution of 90% isopropyl alcohol and 10% deionized water and clean swabs may be used in place of the Preventative
Maintenance Kit.
99

Remove the Printhead

1. Open the media door.
2. See Figure 37. Rotate the two printhead pressure dials to the #1 position.

Figure 37 Locate the Printhead Pressure Dials

4
1
2
3
4

13291L-006 Rev. A

Position number one

Position number four
Thumbscrew
Printhead pressure dials (2)

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Upgrade OptionPrinthead Upgrade Option

3. See Figure 38. Remove the thumbscrew to loosen the printhead fork assembly.
4.

Caution Be sure the printhead is fully open and latched in the open position.

Unlatch the print mechanism and lift and latch it in the open position.
Figure 38 Printhead Removal and Installation
2

1
1

5
8

4
7

1
2
3
4
5
5.

Printhead pressure dial

Thumbscrew
Print mechanism assembly
Locating hole
Printhead power connector

6
7
8
9

Printhead data connector

Lower guide
Printhead fork assembly
Mounting plate

Caution The printhead may be hot and could cause severe burns. Allow the
printhead to cool.

Slide the printhead fork assembly out from the print mechanism assembly to expose the
printhead cable connectors.
6.

Caution Observe proper electrostatic safety precautions when handling

static-sensitive components such as circuit boards and printheads.

Connect yourself to an antistatic device and disconnect both the printhead power and data
cables and remove the printhead assembly.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

165

166

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Upgrade OptionPrinthead Upgrade Option

7. See Figure 39. Remove the lower printhead guide by pushing the tabs away from the fork

assembly.
Figure 39 Remove the Lower Guide

1
3

1
2
3

Printhead fork assembly

Lower guide
Tabs (2)

Install the Printhead

1. See Figure 39. Install the lower guide on the new printhead fork assembly
2. Connect both printhead power and data cables to the printhead connectors and carefully

slide them into position. Ensure the cables are in their proper channels and are not binding
the printhead.
3.

See Figure 38 on page 165. Install the new printhead fork assembly.
Important When mounting the printhead fork assembly onto the print mechanism,
visually inspect and ensure the following:
the cables are in their channels at the back of their carrier assembly
the power cable is under data cable
they are not binding on the print mechanism
4. Ensure the two locating protrusions on the print mechanism mounting plate snap into the

locating holes on the printhead fork assembly. Move the assembly back and forth to be
sure that it is engaged. There should be no movement.
Note The printhead must be properly engaged with the ribbon guide plate to have the

proper print quality.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Upgrade OptionPrinthead Upgrade Option

5. Secure the printhead fork assembly to the printhead housing using the previously removed

thumbscrew.
6. See Figure 37 on page 164. Rotate the two printhead pressure dials back to their original

position.
7.

Caution Do not use sharp objects to clean printhead or platen roller.

Clean the printhead and the platen roller.

Remove the Electronics Cover

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1.

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.
2.

Caution While performing any tasks near an open printhead, remove all rings,
watches, hanging necklaces, identification badges, or other metallic objects that could
touch the printhead.

Remove the media and ribbon.

3. See Figure 40. Remove the electronics cover mounting screw and washer, and then close

the media door.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

167

168

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Upgrade OptionPrinthead Upgrade Option

Figure 40 Remove the Mounting Screw

2
3

1
2
3
4

Media door
Electronics cover upper flange
Electronics cover mounting screw
Washer

4. See Figure 41. Remove the four remaining mounting screws securing the electronics

cover.
5. Remove the electronics cover by lifting straight up on the bottom lip of the electronics

cover.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Upgrade OptionPrinthead Upgrade Option

Figure 41 Remove the Electronics Cover

1
2

5/4/11

Electronics cover
Mounting screws (4)

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

169

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Upgrade OptionPrinthead Upgrade Option

Remove the Main Logic Board

Caution Observe proper electrostatic safety precautions when handling

static-sensitive components such as circuit boards and printheads.

Connect yourself to an antistatic device.

2. See Figure 42. Remove all cables from the main logic board (MLB).

Note Take note of the location of all connectors on the main logic board.

Figure 42 Remove the Main Logic Board Connections

12
3
2
6
11

5
7

F6
LF 1A

170

9
1
2
3
4
5
6

13291L-006 Rev. A

Printhead data (J3)

Power-in (J8)
Front panel (J2)
Stepper motor (J9)
Booster board (J7)
Ribbon sensor (P4)

7
8
9
10
11
12

S4M Maintenance Manual

Transmissive sensor (P9)

Reflective sensor (P7)
Take-label sensor (J19)
Communication expansion port (J17)
USB port (J14)
Serial port (J10)

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Upgrade OptionPrinthead Upgrade Option

3. See Figure 43. Remove the six screws and one nut securing the main logic board to the

main frame of the printer.

4. Remove the two studs and washers securing the serial port connector to the back of the

printer.
Figure 43 Remove the Main Logic Board

4
3
1
2
3
4
5

Main logic board nut

Main logic board mounting screws (6)
Main logic board
Lock washer (2)
Serial port mounting stud (2)

5. Remove the main logic board from the printer.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

171

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Upgrade OptionPrinthead Upgrade Option

Conversion Procedure
The following steps will convert your printer from 203 dpi to 300 dpi. (To convert from 300
dpi to 203 dpi, the gears are installed in the opposite direction, with the smaller side of the
pulley away from the printer when placed on the platen roller.)
1. See Figure 44. Remove the compound gear mounting screw.

Figure 44 Remove the Compound Gear

2
1

1
2

Mounting screw
Compound gear

2. See Figure 45. Turn the gear around and reinstall it in the adjacent mounting hole.
3. Ensure that it meshes properly with the clutch and the intermediate gears.

Figure 45 Select the Compound Gear Position

THIS

E
ID
T/200 DPI
OU

200 dpi

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

E
D

T/300 D
PI

THIS
SI

172

300 dpi

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Upgrade OptionPrinthead Upgrade Option

4. See Figure 46. Using a hex key, loosen the stepper motor pivot screw and locking screw.

Figure 46 Loosen the Stepper Motor

4
5

1
2
3
4
5

Pivot screw
Belt
Platen pulley
Platen pulley set screws (2)
Locking screw

5. Swing the stepper motor up to remove tension from the belt and tighten the locking screw

in this position.
6. Remove the belt from the stepper motor drive gear/pulley.
7. Remove and retain the two set screws on the platen roller pulley. Remove the pulley and

belt. Discard the belt.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

173

174

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Upgrade OptionPrinthead Upgrade Option

8. See Figure 47. Turn the pulley around and place it on the platen roller shaft.

Note Make sure there is approximately a 0.020 in. (0.5 mm) clearance between the

platen roller pulley and the printer frame.

Figure 47 Turn the Compound Pulley Around

9. Install the set screws in the outboard compound pulley. Rotate the compound pulley to

align the set screws with the flat spots on the platen roller shaft.
Figure 48 Align the Platen Roller Shaft
1

1
2

Set screws (2)

Flat spots (2)

10. Tighten the two set screws to secure the pulley to the platen roller shaft.
11. See Figure 46 on page 173. Install the new belt supplied in the kit.
12. Loosen the locking screw and nut.

Note The belt should deflect under finger pressure, but no more than inch (6 mm).
13.

Caution Do not over tighten the belt or damage to the bearings and platen roller will
occur.

Rotate the motor down until the drive belt is just taut. Tighten the locking screw and then
the pivot screw.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Upgrade OptionPrinthead Upgrade Option

Reinstall the MLB

1. See Figure 43 on page 171. Reinstall the MLB in the printer using the screws, nut, and

studs and washers previously removed.

2. See Figure 42 on page 170. Reconnect all the cables previously removed from the main

logic board. Visually inspect and ensure the cables are in their proper location and seated
in the connectors.

Reinstall the Electronics Cover

1. See Figure 33 on page 156. Install the electronics cover by aligning it and sliding down,

ensuring the lower tabs are inside the base and the upper flanges are between the main
frame and the media door.
2. Install the four mounting screws on the back of the printer.
3. See Figure 32 on page 155. Open the media door and install the mounting screw and

washer to secure the electronics cover.

4. Reinstall the media and ribbon.
5. Reconnect AC power cord and data cables.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

175

176

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Upgrade OptionPrinthead Upgrade Option

Verify the Installation

1. Press and hold CANCEL while turning on (l) the printer. A configuration label will print

after the Power-On Self Test (POST) is completed.

Note A 300 dpi configuration label prints smaller than a 203 dpi label.
2. See Figure 49. Verify that the dpi is correct.

Figure 49 Configuration Label (200 dpi or 300 dpi)

3. Turn off (O) the printer.

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Print MechanismPrint Mechanism

Remove the Electronics Cover

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1. Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.
2. See Figure 51. Remove the electronics cover mounting screw and washer and then close

the media door.

Figure 51 Remove the Mounting Screw
1

2
3

1
2
3
4

5/4/11

Media Door
Electronics Cover Upper Flange
Electronics Cover Mounting Screw
Washer

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

179

180

Corrective Maintenance
Print MechanismPrint Mechanism

3. See Figure 52. Remove the four remaining mounting screws securing the electronics

cover.
4. Remove the electronics cover by lifting straight up on the bottom lip of the electronics

cover.
Figure 52 Electronics Cover Removal

1
2

13291L-006 Rev. A

Electronics Cover
Mounting Screws (4)

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Print MechanismPrint Mechanism

Remove the Print Mechanism

Caution Observe proper electrostatic safety precautions when handling

static-sensitive components such as circuit boards and printheads.

Connect yourself to an antistatic device.

2. See Figure 53. Rotate the two printhead pressure dials to the #1 position.

Figure 53 Locate the Printhead Pressure Dials

4
1
2
3
4

5/4/11

Position number one

Position number four
Thumbscrew
Printhead pressure dials (2)

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

181

182

Corrective Maintenance
Print MechanismPrint Mechanism

Caution Use caution when cutting cable ties.

See Figure 54. Remove any cable ties to access the print mechanism cables.
4. Disconnect the printhead data cable from the main logic board (MLB), J3.
5. Remove the printhead data cable from the cable clamps and pull it out from under the

stepper motor and mounting bracket.

6. Disconnect the printhead power cable from the power supply connector.

Figure 54 Disconnect the Print Mechanism

9
1
2
3
4
5

MLB
Printhead data cable
MLB connector J3
Cable clamp (2)
Printhead ground strap

7
6
7
8
9

Printhead power cable

Power supply connector
Stepper motor mounting bracket
Stepper motor

7. Remove the printhead housing grounding strap mounting screw.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Print MechanismPrint Mechanism

8. See Figure 55. Loosen and remove the three mounting screws, and washers securing the

printhead housing assembly.

Figure 55 Printhead Housing Mounting Screws
2
1
3
6

1
2
3
4
5
6

Printhead housing
Large washers (2)
Small washer (used with Phillips screw only)
Phillips head mounting screw (used when
mounting slot aligns with the right hole)
Hex head mounting screw (used when the
mounting slot aligns with the left hole)
Hex head mounting screws (2)

9. Remove the printhead housing assembly from the printer.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

183

184

Corrective Maintenance
Print MechanismPrint Mechanism

Install the New Print Mechanism

1. Are you installing the print mechanism on a Direct Thermal Only S4M printer?

Then

Continue to step 2.

Yes

Caution Be careful not to touch the printhead with any tools. This could
damage the printhead.

See Figure 56. Remove and discard the ribbon strip plate from the new print
mechanism and then continue to step 2.

Figure 56 Remove the Ribbon Strip Plate

2
+

1
2

13291L-006 Rev. A

Mounting screws (2)

Ribbon strip plate

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Print MechanismPrint Mechanism

2. See Figure 55 on page 183. Feed the new cables through the print mechanism mounting

hole.
Note See Figure 57. On most printers, the print mechanism housing aligns with the

mounting boss on the main frame.

3. Install the three printhead housing mounting screws and washers while ensuring that the

print mechanism top edge is even with the main frame mounting boss. Snug the three
mounting screws at this time.
Figure 57 Push Down on the Print Mechanism
3
2
1

1
2
3

Main frame
Print mechanism
Main frame mounting boss

4. See Figure 54 on page 182. Route the printhead data cable down and up behind the

stepper motor mounting plate and connect to J3 on the MLB.

5. Insert the data cable into the flat cable clamps.
6. Connect the printhead power cable to the power supply cable.
7. Reinstall the ground strap.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

185

186

Corrective Maintenance
Print MechanismPrint Mechanism

Adjust the Print Mechanism

1. See Figure 58. Remove the strike plate cap by gently prying up one snap tab with a small

flat blade screwdriver. Loosen the strike plate mounting screws 1/2 turn.
2. See Figure 53 on page 181. Set both printhead pressure dials position #3.

Figure 58 Adjust the Print Mechanism

2
3

5
1
2
3
4
5

Strike plate cap

Adjustment screw
Strike plate
Strike plate mounting screws (2)
Print mechanism gap pin gauges (2)

3. Which model of printer are you working on?

If you have a

Then

S4M w/cam hole

Continue with Adjust the Print Mechanism with Cam.

S4M w/o cam hole Go to .Adjust the Print Mechanism without Cam on page 188

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Print MechanismPrint Mechanism

Adjust the Print Mechanism with Cam

1. See Figure 59. Using the screw provided in the kit, install the print mechanism adjustment

cam, with the large part up, on the printer main frame.
Note The cam should be in contact with print mechanism and only be snug to allow it to
turn with the wrench.

Figure 59 Install the Adjustment Cam

3
2

1
2
3

Cam mounting hole

Cam
Mounting screw

2. See Figure 58 on page 186. Insert the print mechanism gap pin gauges through the holes

that are provided in the front of the ribbon guide plate.

3. Place a 4 inch crescent wrench on the print mechanism adjustment cam. While turning the

wrench counterclockwise, push in and pull out the inside gap pin gauge until a small
amount of friction can be felt.
4. Tighten one of the print mechanism mounting screws.
5. After adjusting the inside pin gauge, use a screwdriver and turn the adjustment screw on

top of the latch plate strike.

6. Push in and pull out the outside gap pin gauge until a small amount of friction can be felt.

Important Check both pin gauges for equal amount of friction.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

187

188

Corrective Maintenance
Print MechanismPrint Mechanism

7. Tighten the latch plate strike screws.

8. Tighten the remaining print mechanism mounting screws when equal pressure is obtained.
9. Remove and retain the cam and screw used for adjusting the print mechanism.
10. Go to Complet the Installation on page 190.

Adjust the Print Mechanism without Cam

1. See Figure 55 on page 183. Slightly loosen the three screws that secure the print

mechanism assembly to the mainframe.

2. Close the print mechanism.
3. See Figure 60. Push down on the print mechanism with a flat blade screw driver while

pushing in and pulling out the inside gap pin gauge until a small amount of friction can be
felt. Tighten one of the hex head screws.

Note On most printers, the print mechanism housing aligns with the mounting boss on

the main frame.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Print MechanismPrint Mechanism

Figure 60 Push Down on the Print Mechanism

1
3
2

1
2
3
4

Screwdriver
Main frame
Print mechanism
Main frame mounting boss

4. See Figure 58 on page 186. After adjusting the inside pin gauge, use a screwdriver and

turn the adjustment screw on top of the latch plate strike.

5. Push in and pull out the outside gap pin gauge until a small amount of friction can be felt.

Important Check both pin gauges for equal amount of friction.

6. Tighten the latch plate strike screws.
7. See Figure 55 on page 183. Tighten the remaining print mechanism mounting screws

when equal pressure is obtained.

8. Continue with Complet the Installation.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

189

190

Corrective Maintenance
Print MechanismPrint Mechanism

Complet the Installation

1. See Figure 58 on page 186. Reinstall the strike plate cap.
2. See Figure 61. Check the gap on the ribbon/printhead open sensor. Use a 0.060 in. (1.5

mm) feeler gauge and check the distance between the ribbon/head open sensor assembly
and the printhead housing.
Is the gap value within specifications?
If

Then

a. Loosen the mounting screw for the ribbon/head open sensor and adjust for

the proper distance.

b. Once this distance is achieved, tighten the mounting screw.
c. Continue with Reinstall the Electronics Cover.
Yes

Continue with Reinstall the Electronics Cover.

Figure 61 Ribbon/Printhead Open Sensor
1

2
3
4

1
2
3
4

13291L-006 Rev. A

Printhead housing
Gap, 0.060 in. (1.5 mm) 0.015 in. (0.381 mm)
Ribbon/Printhead open sensor
Mounting screw

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Print MechanismPrint Mechanism

Reinstall the Electronics Cover

1. See Figure 30 on page 149. Install the cover by aligning it and sliding down, ensuring the

lower tabs are inside the base and the upper flanges are between the main frame and the
media door.
2. Install the four mounting screws on the back of the printer.
3. See Figure 29 on page 148. Open the media door and install the mounting screw and

washer to secure the electronics cover.

Caution When you are loading media or ribbon, remove all jewelry that could come
into contact with the printhead or other printer parts.

Reinstall the media and ribbon.

5. See Figure 53 on page 181. Rotate the two printhead pressure dials to position 3.
6. Reconnect AC power cord and data cables.

Verify the Installation

1. See Figure 62. Press and hold PAUSE and CANCEL while turning on (l) the printer.

A Pause and Cancel Self Test Label will print.

Figure 62 PAUSE and CANCEL Test Label

2. Ensure that the black bar is mostly filled in solid and that the bottom line is parallel to the

edge of the label. The black bar can have small voids of white.
3. Repeat adjustment procedures if further adjustments are needed.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

191

192

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Cables

Printhead Cables
This procedure is for installing the printhead power and data cables in the S4M printer. Read
these instructions thoroughly before performing this procedure.
Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Phillips Screwdriver Set

4 inch crescent wrench

Flat-Blade Screwdriver Set

47362 Zebra Preventative Maintenance

Kit

Metric Hex Key (Allen wrench) Set

Anti-Static Wriststrap and Mat

Metric and/or inch Feeler Gauges; must

include: 0.060 in. (1.5mm)

Metric Nutdriver Set

Remove the Electronics Cover

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1.

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.
2.

Caution While performing any tasks near an open printhead, remove all rings,
watches, hanging necklaces, identification badges, or other metallic objects that could
touch the printhead.

Remove the media and ribbon.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Cables

3. See Figure 63. Remove the electronics cover mounting screw and washer, and then close

the media door.

Figure 63 Remove the Mounting Screw
1

2
3

1
2
3
4

5/4/11

Media door
Electronics cover upper flange
Electronics cover mounting screw
Washer

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

193

194

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Cables

4. See Figure 64. Remove the four remaining mounting screws securing the electronics

cover.
5. Remove the electronics cover by lifting straight up on the bottom lip of the electronics

cover.
Figure 64 Remove the Electronics Cover

1
2

13291L-006 Rev. A

Electronics cover
Mounting screws (4)

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Cables

Remove the Print Mechanism

Caution Observe proper electrostatic safety precautions when handling

static-sensitive components such as circuit boards and printheads.

Connect yourself to an antistatic device.

2. See Figure 65. Rotate the printhead pressure dials to the #1 position.

Figure 65 Locate the Printhead Pressure Knobs

4
1
2
3
4

5/4/11

Position number one

Position number four
Thumbscrew
Printhead pressure dials (2)

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

195

196

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Cables

Caution Use caution when cutting cable ties.

See Figure 66. Remove any cable ties to access the print mechanism cables.
4. Disconnect the printhead data cable from the main logic board (MLB).
5. Disconnect the printhead power cable from the power supply connector.

Figure 66 Disconnect the Print Mechanism

6
1
2
3
4
5
6

Main logic board (MLB)

Printhead data cable
MLB connector J3
Printhead ground strap
Printhead power cable
Power supply connector

6. Remove the printhead housing grounding strap mounting screw.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Cables

7. See Figure 67. Loosen and remove the two hex head screws, one phillips head screw, and

washers securing the printhead housing assembly.

Figure 67 Printhead Housing Mounting Screws
2
1
3
6

1
2
3
4
5
6

8. Remove the printhead housing assembly from the printer.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

197

198

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Cables

Remove the Old Printhead Cables

Caution The printhead may be hot and could cause severe burns. Allow the
printhead to cool.

See Figure 68. Remove the thumbscrew.

2. Remove the printhead fork assembly from the print mechanism.

Figure 68 Remove the Printhead Fork Assembly

3
1
2
3
4
5

Print mechanism
Thumbscrew
Printhead power cable
Printhead data cable
Printhead fork assembly

3. Disconnect the printhead power and data cables.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Cables

4. See Figure 69. Lay the print mechanism on its top and slide the cables toward the hinge

and out.
Figure 69 Remove and Install the Cables
1
2

3
5

1
2
3
4
5

Printhead data cable

Printhead power cable
Hinge
Printhead data connector
Printhead power connector

Install the New Printhead Cables

1. See Figure 69. Slide each of the cables through the hinge and into the print mechanism.
2.

See Figure 68 on page 198. Connect the printhead cables to the printhead fork assembly.
3. Reinstall the printhead fork assembly into the print mechanism.

Ensure that the printhead cables are up and away from the printhead to avoid damage to
the new cables and to allow the printhead to seat properly.
4. Use the thumbscrew removed previously to secure the printhead fork assembly.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

199

200

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Cables

Reinstall the Print Mechanism

1. See Figure 67 on page 197. Feed the new cables through the print mechanism mounting

hole.
Note See Figure 70. On most printers, the print mechanism housing aligns with the

mounting boss on the main frame.

2. Install the three printhead housing mounting screws and washers while ensuring that the

print mechanism top edge is even with the main frame mounting boss. Snug the three
mounting screws at this time.
Figure 70 Push Down on the Print Mechanism
3
2
1

1
2
3

Main frame
Print mechanism
Main frame mounting boss

3. See Figure 66 on page 196. Route the printhead data cable down and up behind the

stepper motor mounting plate and connect to J3 on the MLB.

4. Insert the data cable into the flat cable clamps.
5. Connect the printhead power cable to the power supply connector.
6. Reinstall the ground strap.
13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Cables

Adjust the Print Mechanism

1. See Figure 71. Remove the strike plate cap by gently prying up one snap tab with a small

flat blade screwdriver. Loosen the strike plate mounting screws 1/2 turn.
2. See Figure 65 on page 195. Set both printhead pressure dials position #3.

Figure 71 Adjust the Print Mechanism

1
2
3
4

5
1
2
3
4
5

Strike plate cap

Adjustment screw
Strike plate
Strike plate mounting screws (2)
Print mechanism gap pin gauges (2)

3. Which model of printer are you working on?

If you have a

Then

S4M w/cam hole

Continue with Adjust the Print Mechanism with Cam Hole.

S4M w/o cam hole Go to Adjust the Print Mechanism without Cam Hole on page 203.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

201

202

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Cables

Adjust the Print Mechanism with Cam Hole

1. See Figure 72. Using the screw provided in the kit, install the print mechanism adjustment

cam on the printer main frame.

Note The cam should be in contact with print mechanism. Only slightly tighten the

screw to allow the cam to turn with the 4 in. crescent wrench.
Figure 72 Install the Adjustment Cam
3
2

1
2
3

Cam mounting hole

Cam
Mounting screw

2. See Figure 71 on page 201. Insert the print mechanism gap pin gauges through the holes

that are provided in the front of the ribbon guide plate.

3. Place a 4 inch crescent wrench on the print mechanism adjustment cam. While turning the

wrench counterclockwise, push in and pull out the inside gap pin gauge until a small
amount of friction can be felt.
4. Tighten one of the print mechanism mounting screws.
5. After aligning the inside pin gauge, use a screwdriver and turn the adjustment screw on

top of the latch plate strike.

6. Push in and pull out the outside gap pin gauge until a small amount of friction can be felt.

Important Check both pin gauges for equal amount of friction.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Cables

7. Tighten the latch plate strike screws.

Adjust the Print Mechanism without Cam Hole

1. See Figure 67 on page 197. Slightly loosen the three screws that secure the print

mechanism assembly to the mainframe.

2. Close the print mechanism.
3. See Figure 73. Push down on the print mechanism with a flat blade screw driver while

pushing in and pulling out the inside gap pin gauge until a small amount of friction can be
felt. Snug the two hex head screws.
Note On most printers, the print mechanism housing aligns with the mounting boss on

the main frame.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

203

204

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Cables

Figure 73 Push Down on the Print Mechanism

1
3
2

1
2
3
4

Screwdriver
Main frame
Print mechanism
Main frame mounting boss

4. See Figure 71 on page 201. After adjusting the inside pin gauge, use a screwdriver and

turn the adjustment screw on top of the latch plate strike.

5. Push in and pull out the outside gap pin gauge until a small amount of friction can be felt.

Important Check both pin gauges for equal amount of friction.

6. Tighten the latch plate strike screws.
7. See Figure 67 on page 197. Tighten the three printhead mechanism mounting screws

when equal pressure is obtained.

8. Continue with Complete the Installation.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Cables

Complete the Installation

1. See Figure 71 on page 201. Replace the strike plate cap.
2. See Figure 74. Check the gap on the ribbon/printhead open sensor. Use a 0.060 in. (1.5

mm) feeler gauge and check the distance between the ribbon/head open sensor assembly
and the printhead housing.
Is the gap value within specifications?

Then

a. Loosen the mounting screw for the ribbon/head open sensor and adjust for

the proper distance.

b. Once this distance is achieved, tighten the mounting screw.
c. Continue with Complete the Installation.

Yes

Continue with Complete the Installation.

Figure 74 Ribbon/Printhead Open Sensor

4
1
2
3
4

5/4/11

Printhead housing
Gap, 0.060 in. (1.5 mm) 0.015 in. (0.381 mm)
Ribbon/Printhead open sensor
Mounting screw

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

205

206

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Cables

Reinstall the Electronics Cover

1. See Figure 64 on page 194. Install the cover by aligning it and sliding down, ensuring the

lower tabs are inside the base and the upper flanges are between the main frame and the
media door.
2. Install the four mounting screws on the back of the printer.
3. See Figure 63 on page 193. Open the media door and install the mounting screw and

washer to secure the electronics cover.

Caution When you are loading media or ribbon, remove all jewelry that could come
into contact with the printhead or other printer parts.

Reinstall the media and ribbon.

5. See Figure 65 on page 195. Rotate the two printhead pressure dials to position 3.
6. Reconnect AC power cord and data cables.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Cables

Verify the Installation

1. See Figure 75. Hold PAUSE and CANCEL while turning on (l) the printer; a Pause and

Cancel Self Test Label will print.

Figure 75 Pause and Cancel Label

2. Ensure that the black bar is mostly filled in solid and that the bottom line is parallel to the

edge of the label. The black bar can have small voids of white.
3. Repeat adjustment procedures if further adjustments are needed.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

207

208

Corrective Maintenance
Latch Assembly

Latch Assembly
Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Phillips Screwdriver Set

Punch Set

Flat-blade Screwdriver Set

Safety Goggles

Standard Nutdriver Set

4 Inch Crescent Wrench

Metric Nutdriver Set

Small Hammer

Remove the Old Latch

1. Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and data cables.
2.

Caution While performing any tasks near an open printhead, remove all rings,
watches, hanging necklaces, identification badges, or other metallic objects that could
touch the printhead.

See Figure 76. Open the media door and remove the media.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Latch Assembly

Figure 76 Media Door and Latch Location (S4M)

3
1
2
3
4

5/4/11

Media door
Latch assembly
Latch plate cover
Strike plate cap

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

209

210

Corrective Maintenance
Latch Assembly

3. See Figure 77. Remove the strike plate cap by placing a small screwdriver under the front

edge and lifting upward.

Figure 77 Remove the Latch Assembly
3

12
8

6
7

11
9

10
1
2
3
4
5
6

Print mechanism
Adjustment screw
Strike plate cap
Strike plate
Washer
Strike plate mounting
screws (2)

7
8
9
10
11
12

Latch plate cover

Latch plate
Spring pin
Compression spring
Platen housing
Ribbon strip plate

4. Remove the latch plate cover.

5. Remove the two screws and the washer holding the latch strike plate to the side of the

print mechanism.
6. Remove the adjustment screw from the print mechanism. You will have to pull out on the

bottom of the strike plate while removing the screw.

Caution Wear protective eyewear when installing or removing E-rings, C-clips, snap
rings, springs, and mounting buttons. These are under tension and could fly off.

Remove the latch cover.

8. Using a small punch, lightly tap the spring pin out from the FRONT of the platen housing

(the direction is important). The compression spring may fall out.

Important Tap lightly when removing the spring pin. The platen housing is a cast

housing and may break if hit too hard.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Latch Assembly

Install the New Latch Kit

1. See Figure 77 on page 210. Install the compression spring on the platen housing post.
2. Align the latch with the spring pin holes.
3. Insert the spring pin through the front hole of the latch and through the platen housing.

The rear hole in the latch is the only small one and you will need to tap on the spring pin.
4. Lightly tap the spring pin into the rear hole. Leave equal amounts of spring pin sticking

out on each side of latch.

5. Install the strike plate partially into print mechanism.
6. See Figure 78. Install the adjustment screw into the strike plate by sliding it in the opening

with the shoulder below the top piece of sheet metal and above the bottom piece of sheet
metal.
Figure 78 Adjustment Screw Location
1
3

1
2
3

Strike plate
Adjustment screw
Adjustment screw shoulder

7. See Figure 77 on page 210. Tighten the adjustment screw until the top of the strike plate is

just below the top of the print mechanism.

8. Install the two mounting screws and washer through the strike plate and into the print

mechanism. Do not tighten at this time; leave them approximately turn loose. Latch the
print mechanism.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

211

212

Corrective Maintenance
Latch Assembly

9. See Figure 79. Insert the print mechanism gap pin gauges through the holes that are

provided in the front of the ribbon strip plate.

Figure 79 Adjust the Print Mechanism
1
2
3

1
2
3
4
5
6

Print mechanism adjustment cam

Strike plate cap
Adjustment screw
Strike plate
Strike plate mounting screws (2)
Print mechanism gap pin gauges (2)

10. Turn the adjustment screw counterclockwise to increase the resistance or clockwise to

decrease the resistance until a small amount of friction is felt on the gap pin gauge.
11. Snug the two strike plate mounting screws.
12. Verify, with gap pin gauge, that the inside print mechanism adjustment is correct. A slight

friction should be felt when sliding the inside pin in and out of the inside hole.
13. Is the adjustment acceptable?

13291L-006 Rev. A

Then

Continue with step 14.

Yes

Go to Compltete the Installation on page 216.

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Latch Assembly

14. Loosen the two strike plate screws.

15. Which model of printer are you working on?

If you have a

Then

Z4Mplus/Z6Mplus Continue with Compltete the Installation.

or
S4M w/cam hole
S4M w/o cam hole Go to Adjust the Print Mechanism without Cam on page 215.

Adjust Print Mechanism with Cam

1. See Figure 80. Install the print mechanism adjustment cam on the printer frame with the

screw provided in the kit.

Figure 80 Print Mechanism Mounting Screws
1

2
3

5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Print mechanism
Adjusting cam
Hex head mounting screws (2)
Large washer
Small washer (used with Phillips screw only)
Phillips head mounting screw (used when
mounting slot aligns with the right hole)
Hex head mounting screw (used when the
mounting slot aligns with the left hole)

2. Slightly loosen the three screws that secure the print mechanism assembly to the

mainframe.
5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

213

214

Corrective Maintenance
Latch Assembly

3. See Figure 79 on page 212. Use a 4 inch crescent wrench on the print mechanism

adjustment cam. While turning the wrench counterclockwise, push in and pull out the
inside gap pin gauge until a small amount of friction can be felt.
4. Figure 80. Tighten the three mounting screws.
5. After setting the inside gap pin gauge, verify that the outside adjustment is correct.

Double-check both gap pin gauges for equal amount of friction. Tighten the latch strike
plate screws.
6. Remove the print mechanism adjustment cam by removing the mounting screw.
7. Go to Compltete the Installation on page 216.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Latch Assembly

Adjust the Print Mechanism without Cam

1. See Figure 80 on page 213. Slightly loosen the three screws that secure the print

mechanism assembly to the mainframe.

2. See Figure 81. Push down on the print mechanism with a flat blade screw driver while

the main frame.

Figure 81 Push Down on the Print Mechanism
4

1
3
2

1
2
3
4

Screwdriver
Main frame
Print mechanism
Main frame mounting boss

3. See Figure 79 on page 212. After adjusting the inside pin gauge, use a screwdriver and

turn the adjustment screw on top of the latch plate strike.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

215

216

Corrective Maintenance
Latch Assembly

4. Push in and pull out the outside gap pin gauge until a small amount of friction can be felt.

Important Check both pin gauges for equal amount of friction.

5. Tighten the latch plate strike screws.
6. Continue with Compltete the Installation.

Compltete the Installation

1. See Figure 77 on page 210. Install the strike plate cap.
2. Install the latch cover.
3.

Caution When you are loading media or ribbon, remove all jewelry that could come
into contact with the printhead or other printer parts.

Reinstall the media and ribbon.

4. Close the media door.
5. Reconnect the AC power cord and data cables.
6. Turn on (l) the printer.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Pressure Dials

Printhead Pressure Dials

This procedure is for installing the printhead pressure dial on the S4M printer. Read these
instructions thoroughly before performing this procedure.
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Phillips Screwdriver Set

Antistatic Wriststrap and Mat

Flat-blade Screwdriver Set

Masking Tape

Metric Nutdriver Set

47362* Zebra Preventive Maintenance

Kit

* In place of the Preventive Maintenance Kit, you may use a clean swab dipped in a solution of isopropyl
alcohol (minimum 90%) and deionized water (maximum 10%).

Remove the Printhead

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1.

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.
2.

Caution While performing any tasks near an open printhead, remove all rings,
watches, hanging necklaces, identification badges, or other metallic objects that could
touch the printhead.

Open the media door, open the printhead, and remove media and ribbon.
3.

Caution Observe proper electrostatic safety precautions when handling

static-sensitive components such as circuit boards and printheads.

Connect yourself to an antistatic device.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

217

218

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Pressure Dials

4. See Figure 82. Close the printhead and rotate the printhead pressure dials to the #1

position.
Figure 82 Locate the Printhead Pressure Dials
1

4
1
2
3
4

13291L-006 Rev. A

Position number one

Position number four
Thumbscrew
Printhead pressure dials (2)

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Pressure Dials

Caution The printhead may be hot and could cause severe burns. Allow the
printhead to cool.

See Figure 83. Remove the printhead thumbscrew.

Figure 83 Remove the Printhead and Cable Connections

1
2
3

4
5
7
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6.

Thumbscrew
Printhead pressure dial
Print mechanism assembly
Printhead data cable
Printhead power cable
Printhead fork assembly
Locating holes
Locating pins

Caution While performing any tasks near an open printhead, remove all rings,
watches, hanging necklaces, identification badges, or other metallic objects that could
touch the printhead.

Open the print mechanism, and lift and latch it in the vertical position.
7. Slide the printhead fork assembly out of the print mechanism.
8. Disconnect the two printhead cables from the printhead assembly.
9. Remove the printhead assembly and set it aside on the antistatic mat.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

219

220

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Pressure Dials

Remove the Old Pressure Dials

To remove the pressure dials you must partially disassemble the print mechanism.
1. See Figure 84. Place a soft pad down on your workbench and lay the printer on it with the

electronics cover side down.

2. Open the media door.

Figure 84 Set the Printer on the Electronics Cover Side

3. See Figure 85. Put a piece of masking tape over the pressure roller to secure it to the

pressure bracket.
This is being done for ease of reinstallation of the roller and bracket.
Figure 85 Remove the Pressure Bracket and Roller

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Pressure Dials

7
6

2
3
4

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Print mechanism
Pressure bracket
Masking tape (2)
Pressure bracket mounting screw
Lifting spring
Lower print mechanism latch screw
Upper print mechanism latch screw

4. Loosen the lower print mechanism latch screw to allow the pressure bracket to be

removed.
Important To avoid print mechanism readjustment, do not loosen the top latch screw.
5. Remove the pressure bracket mounting screw, and swing the bracket out of the way.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

221

222

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Pressure Dials

6. See Figure 86. Remove and discard the dials and springs from the print mechanism.

Figure 86 Remove the Pressure Dials

1
2

Pressure dial and spring

Pressure bracket

Install the New Pressure Dials

1. See Figure 87. Install the new springs in to the new dials.

Figure 87 Install the Springs

1
2

Pressure dial
Spring

2. See Figure 86 on page 222. Insert the new dials and springs into the print mechanism.
3. See Figure 85 on page 220. Reinstall the pressure bracket and roller, and then remove the

masking tape.
4. Reinstall the lower latch screw.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Pressure Dials

5. Tighten the lower print mechanism latch screw.

6. See Figure 83 on page 219. Connect the printhead cables to the printhead fork assembly.

Lift the assembly and carefully slide the assembly into the print mechanism, ensuring the
data cable and power cable are kept away from the printhead lifting spring (see Figure 85
on page 220).
7. See Figure 88. Align the two alignment pins on the printhead with the two alignment holes

in the print mechanism.

Figure 88 Align the Forks and Bearings
1

2
3
4

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Thumbscrew
Alignment holes
Wire guide
Alignment pins
Platen housing
Forks (2)
Bearings (2)

8. Lift and hold the printhead in position while securing it with the previously removed

thumbscrew and then close the print mechanism.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

223

224

Corrective Maintenance
Printhead Pressure Dials

9. Set the printer up on the base.

10. Open the print mechanism and latch it in the open position.
11.

Caution Do not use sharp objects to clean the printhead or platen roller.

Using the Zebra Preventive Maintenance Kit, clean the printhead and platen roller.
12.

Caution When you are loading media or ribbon, remove all jewelry that could come
into contact with the printhead or other printer parts.

Reinstall the media and ribbon.

13. See Figure 82 on page 218. Rotate the two printhead pressure dials to the desired position

for your daily printing.

14. Close the media door.
15. Reconnect the AC power cord and data cables.
16. Turn on (l) the printer.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Sensors

This section provides replacement and installation procedures for the S4M sensors.

Contents
Transmissive Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ribbon/Head Open Sensor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reflective Media Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Take-Label Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

226
233
241
247

13291L-006 Rev. A

226

Corrective Maintenance
Transmissive Sensor

Transmissive Sensor
This procedure is for installing the transmissive sensor in the S4M printer. Read these
instructions thoroughly before performing this procedure.

Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Phillips Screwdriver Set

Safety Goggles

Wire Cutters

Metric Nutdriver Set

AntiStatic Mat and Wrist Strap

Metric Hex Key Allen wrench) Set

Remove the Electronics Cover

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1.

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Transmissive Sensor

2. See Figure 89. Remove the electronics cover mounting screw and washer and then close

the media door.

Figure 89 Remove the Mounting Screw
1

1
2
3
4

5/4/11

Media door
Electronics cover upper flange
Electronics cover mounting screw
Washer

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

227

228

Corrective Maintenance
Transmissive Sensor

3. See Figure 90. Remove the four remaining mounting screws securing the electronics

cover.
4. Remove the electronics cover by lifting straight up on the bottom lip of the electronics

cover.
Figure 90 Remove the Electronics Cover

1
2

13291L-006 Rev. A

Electronics cover
Mounting screws (4)

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Transmissive Sensor

Remove the Stepper Motor

Caution Observe proper electrostatic safety precautions when handling

static-sensitive components such as circuit boards and printheads.

Connect yourself to an antistatic device.

2. See Figure 91. Locate the stepper motor and drive belt.

Figure 91 Locate Drive System Components

6
1
2
3
4
5
6

Main logic board (MLB) J9

Stepper motor
Drive belt
Platen pulley
Locking screw
Pivot screw

3. Disconnect the stepper motor cable from the J9 connector on the main logic board (MLB).
4. Remove the locking screw and nut.
5. Remove the pivot screw and then remove the stepper motor.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

229

230

Corrective Maintenance
Transmissive Sensor

Remove the Old Transmissive Sensor

1. Disconnect the transmissive sensor from the main logic board (P9).
2. See Figure 92. Remove the transmissive sensor mounting screw and then remove the

transmissive sensor.
Figure 92 Remove the Transmissive Sensor

4
1
2
3
4

13291L-006 Rev. A

Mounting screw
Transmissive sensor
Guide pin hole
Access hole

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Transmissive Sensor

Install the New Transmissive Sensor

1. See Figure 92. Align the transmissive sensor to the main frame with the guide pin in the

guide pin hole, and the mounting hole lining up with the mounting hole in the main frame.
2. Feed the sensor wires through the proper access hole under the printhead assembly.
3.

Caution Do not over tighten the belt, damage to the bearings and platen roller will
occur.

Hold the sensor assembly in place, ensuring it is fully inserted into the guide pin hole, and
install the mounting screw supplied in the kit.
4. Run the transmissive sensor wires through the protective wrap and then connect them to

the main logic board (P9).

Reinstall the Stepper Motor and Gear/Pulley

1. See Figure 91 on page 229. Install the stepper motor by sliding the gear/pulley through the

drive belt. Secure in position with the pivot screw, but do not tighten at this time.
2. Reinstall the locking screw and nut, but do not tighten at this time
3.

Caution Do not over tighten the belt, damage to the bearings and platen roller will
occur. The belt should deflect under finger pressure but no more than inch (6 mm).

Reinstall the belt.

Loosen the locking screw.

Rotate the motor down until the drive belt is taut.

Tighten the locking screw.

Tighten the pivot screw.

Reinstall the Electronics Cover

1. See Figure 90 on page 228. Install the cover by aligning it and sliding down, ensuring the

lower tabs are inside the base and the upper flanges are between the main frame and the
media door.
2. Install the four mounting screws on the back of the printer.
3. See Figure 89 on page 227. Open the media door and install the mounting screw and

washer to secure the electronics cover.

4. Reinstall the media and ribbon.
5. Reconnect the AC power cord and the data cables.
6. Turn on (l) the printer.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

231

232

Corrective Maintenance
Transmissive Sensor

Select the S4M Media Sensor (password Level 2)

You must select the correct Sensor Select setting for your printer application. See Select the
Media Sensor on page 80 to change the setting using the control panel. Refer to the
programming guide for your printer to change the setting using the programming commands.
You may allow the printer to select a media sensor based on the media type, or you may select
a specific media sensor to be used if the sensor that was selected by the printer does not detect
media correctly.
Note Changing the Sensor Select setting initiates an auto-calibration.

Selections:
DEFAULTThe printer selects a sensor based on the setting specified for MEDIA
TYPE:
Media Type

Sensor Used

GAP/NOTCH

Transmissive

CONTINUOUS

Reflective

MARK

Transmissive

TRANSMISSIVEUse with all continuous media or with most types of noncontinuous media.
REFLECTIVEUse with black mark media or with non-continuous media that does
not work well with the transmissive sensor.
Default Value: DEFAULT

To modify this parameter:

Press the up or down arrow to scroll through the selections.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Ribbon/Head Open Sensor Assembly

Ribbon/Head Open Sensor Assembly

This procedure is for installing the ribbon/printhead open sensor in the S4M printer. Read
these instructions thoroughly before performing this procedure.

Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Phillips Screwdriver Set

Antistatic Wriststrap and Mat

Metric Nutdriver Set

Metric and inch Feeler Gauges; must

include: 0.060 in. (1.5 mm)

Remove the Electronics Cover

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1.

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

233

234

Corrective Maintenance
Ribbon/Head Open Sensor Assembly

2. See Figure 93. Remove the electronics cover mounting screw and washer and then close

the media door.

Figure 93 Remove the Mounting Screw
1

2
3

1
2
3
4

13291L-006 Rev. A

Media door
Electronics cover upper flange
Electronics cover mounting screw
Washer

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Ribbon/Head Open Sensor Assembly

3. See Figure 94. Remove the four remaining mounting screws securing the electronics

cover.
4. Remove the electronics cover by lifting straight up on the bottom lip of the electronics

cover.
Figure 94 Remove the Electronics Cover

1
2

5/4/11

Electronics cover
Mounting screws (4)

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

235

236

Corrective Maintenance
Ribbon/Head Open Sensor Assembly

Remove the Old Ribbon/Head Open Sensor

1. See Figure 95. Disconnect the sensor cable from P4 on the main logic board (MLB).
2. Remove the cable wires from the protective wrap.
3. See RRP No. 1 on page 154 and remove the electronics cover.
4. See Figure 95. Disconnect the sensor cable from the MLB (P4).
5. Remove the cable wires from the protective wrap.

Figure 95 Disconnect the Ribbon/Head Open Sensor (S4M)

1
2
3
4

13291L-006 Rev. A

Main logic board (MLB)

MLB connector (P4)
Protective wrap
Access hole

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Ribbon/Head Open Sensor Assembly

6. See Figure 96. Remove the screw securing the ribbon/head open sensor assembly.
7. Pull the ribbon sensor cable and connector through the main frame.

Figure 96 Ribbon Sensor Removal and Installation

1
2

1
2
3

Ribbon/Head open sensor assembly

Mounting screw
Access hole

Install the New Ribbon/Head Open Sensor

1. See Figure 95. Route the sensor wires, with connector, through the access hole in the

printer mainframe.
2. Place the sensor cable wires back into the protective wrap.
3. Connect the media sensor cable to P4 on the MLB.
4. See Figure 95. Install the ribbon/head open sensor to the mainframe with the new screw.

Do not tighten it at this time.

5. See Figure 96 and Figure 95. Route the sensor wires, with connector, through the access

hole in the printer mainframe.

6. Place the sensor cable wires back into the protective wrap.
7. Connect the media sensor cable to the main logic board at P4.
8. Install the ribbon/head open sensor to the mainframe with the new screw. Do not tighten it

at this time.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

237

238

Corrective Maintenance
Ribbon/Head Open Sensor Assembly

9. See Figure 97. Using a 0.060 0.015 inch (1.5 mm) feeler gauge, check the distance

between the ribbon/head open sensor assembly and the printhead mechanism assembly.
Once this distance is achieved, tighten the mounting screw.
Figure 97 Gap Measurement between Print Mechanism and Sensor

0.060 in.(1.5 mm)

0.015 in.
1
1
2

Gap
Mounting screw

Reinstall the Electronics Cover

1. See Figure 94 on page 235. Install the cover by aligning it and sliding down, ensuring the

lower tabs are inside the base and the upper flanges are between the main frame and the
media door.
2. Install the four mounting screws on the back of the printer.
3. See Figure 93 on page 234. Open the media door and install the mounting screw and

washer to secure the electronics cover.

Caution When you are loading media or ribbon, remove all jewelry that could come
into contact with the printhead or other printer parts.

Reinstall the media and ribbon.

5. Reconnect the AC power cord and the data cables.
6. Turn on (l) the printer.
7. After the Power-on Self Test (POST), unlatch the printhead mechanism. Look at the front

panel to ensure the error/alert LED flashes and the LCD displays ALERT HEAD OPEN.
8. Close the printhead.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Ribbon/Head Open Sensor Assembly

Calibrate the S4M

Perform this procedure only if the thermal transfer option is installed.
1. Press MENU to enter the Setup Mode.
2. Press the right arrow () until ADVANCED

SETUP 3 is displayed.

3. Press ENTER, the printer displays PASSWORD and the number 0000.
4. Enter the four-digit password for the password level displayed. The factory default

password for is 1234.

The left and right arrows change the selected digit position. The up and down arrows
change the value of the selected digit.
5. After entering the password, press ENTER.

If you entered a valid password, additional parameters are displayed.

6. Press the right arrow () until MEDIA/RIBBON CALIBRATE is displayed.
7. Press ENTER to start the calibration procedure.

The LOAD BACKING/REMOVE RIBBON prompt displays.

8. Open the printhead.
9. Remove approximately 8 in. (203 mm) of labels from the backing, and pull the media into

the printer so that only the backing is between the media sensors.
10. Remove the ribbon.
11. Close the printhead.
12. Press ENTER to continue.

CALIBRATING PLEASE WAIT displays.

The printer adjusts the scale (gain) of the signals that it receives from the media and
ribbon sensors based on the specific media and ribbon combination being used. On the
sensor profile, this corresponds to moving the peak of the graph up or down to optimize
the readings for your application.
When calibration is complete, RELOAD ALL displays.
13. Open the printhead and pull the media forward until a label is positioned under the media

sensor.
14. Reload the ribbon (if used) and close the printhead.
15. Press ENTER to continue.

The printer performs an auto-calibration. During this process, the printer checks the
readings for the media and ribbon based on the new scale established, determines the label
length, and determines the print mode. To see the new readings on the new scale, print a
sensor profile.
After the auto-calibration is complete, MEDIA/RIBBON CALIBRATE is displayed.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

239

240

Corrective Maintenance
Ribbon/Head Open Sensor Assembly

16. Press MENU.

SAVE CHANGES displays.

17. Press the up () or down arrows () to select YES.
18. Press ENTER to permanently save the calibration and return to PRINTER READY.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Reflective Media Sensor

Reflective Media Sensor

This procedure is for installing the reflective media sensor in the S4M printer. Read these
instructions thoroughly before performing this procedure.

Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Phillips Screwdriver Set

Antistatic Wriststrap and Mat

Flat-blade Screwdriver Set

Safety Goggles

Wire Cutters
Note Before starting, print a configuration label by pressing and holding CANCEL while
turning on (l) the printer.

Remove the Electronics Cover

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1. Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

241

242

Corrective Maintenance
Reflective Media Sensor

2. See Figure 98. Remove the electronics cover mounting screw and washer and then close

the media door.

Figure 98 Remove the Mounting Screw
1

2
3

1
2
3
4

13291L-006 Rev. A

Media door
Electronics cover upper flange
Electronics cover mounting screw
Washer

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Reflective Media Sensor

3. See Figure 99. Remove the four remaining mounting screws securing the electronics

cover.
4. Remove the electronics cover by lifting straight up on the bottom lip of the electronics

cover.
Figure 99 Remove the Electronics Cover

1
2

5/4/11

Electronics cover
Mounting screws (4)

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

243

244

Corrective Maintenance
Reflective Media Sensor

5. See Figure 100. Disconnect the media sensor connector from P7 on the MLB.
6. Remove the wires from the protective wrap and then feed the wires with the connector

through the access hole in the frame.

Figure 100 Media Sensor Connection to MLB

1
1
2
3
4

13291L-006 Rev. A

Main logic board (MLB)

MLB connector P7
Protective wrap
Access hole

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Reflective Media Sensor

Remove the Old Reflective Sensor

1. See Figure 101. Cut the cable tie securing the media sensor wires inside the wire way of

the platen roller housing.

Figure 101 Media Sensor Removal

1
2

4
4

1
2
3
4
5
6

Platen roller housing

Cable tie
Wireway
Media sensor holder tabs (2)
Media sensor assembly
Latch cover

2. Gently remove the latch cover.

3. Slide the media sensor carrier all the way out until it stops, and then gently press down on

the carrier and slide the carrier until it drops out of the platen housing.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

245

246

Corrective Maintenance
Reflective Media Sensor

Install the New Reflective Sensor

1. See Figure 101 on page 245. Route the media sensor wires through the wireway in the

platen roller assembly and through the access hole in the printer frame.
2. Install a cable tie to secure the wires in the wireway.

Note Ensure the wire harness inside the platen roller housing wireway has no twists and

travels freely along the entire route.

3. Align the media sensor carrier slots with the slides provided on the platen roller assembly

and slide the carrier part way in. Gently press down on the media sensor carrier and push
the carrier past the stop.
4. Release the carrier and push it back and forth to verify traveling its entire route on the

platen housing tracks.

5. Reinstall the platen assembly latch cover.
6. See Figure 100 on page 244. Route the wires behind the ground strap of the printhead.
7. Insert the wires into the protective wrap.
8. Connect the media sensor to P7 on the MLB.

Reinstall the Electronics Cover

1. See Figure 99 on page 243. Install the cover by aligning it and sliding down, ensuring the

lower tabs are inside the base and the upper flanges are between the main frame and the
media door.
2. Install the four mounting screws on the back of the printer.
3. See Figure 98 on page 242. Open the media door and install the mounting screw and

washer to secure the electronics cover.

4. Reinstall the media and ribbon.
5. Reconnect the AC power cord and data cables.
6. Turn on (l) the printer.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Take-Label Sensor

Take-Label Sensor
Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Phillips Screwdriver Set

Antistatic Wriststrap and Mat

Metric Nutdriver Set

Remove the Electronics Cover

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1.

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

247

248

Corrective Maintenance
Take-Label Sensor

2. See Figure 102. Remove the electronics cover mounting screw and washer and then close

the media door.

Figure 102 Remove the Mounting Screw
1

2
3

1
2
3
4

13291L-006 Rev. A

Media door
Electronics cover upper flange
Electronics cover mounting screw
Washer

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Take-Label Sensor

3. See Figure 103. Remove the four remaining mounting screws securing the electronics

cover.
4. Remove the electronics cover by lifting straight up on the bottom lip of the electronics

cover.
Figure 103 Remove the Electronics Cover

1
2

Electronics cover
Mounting screws (4)

Remove the Control Panel

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1.

Caution Observe proper electrostatic safety precautions when handling

static-sensitive components such as circuit boards and printheads.

Connect yourself to an antistatic device.

2. See RRP No. 1 on page 154 and remove the electronics cover.
3. See Figure 104. Disconnect the control panel ribbon cable from J2 on the main logic board

(MLB).
4. If installed, remove the take-label sensor cable from J19 on the MLB and then remove it

from the conduit.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

249

250

Corrective Maintenance
Take-Label Sensor

Figure 104 Remove and Install the Control Panel

13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Main frame
Main logic board (MLB)
J19, Take-label sensor
Control panel cable
J2, Control panel
Mounting screw
Split washer

8
9
10
11
12
13

Star washer
Control panel
Tab
Cable access hole
Access hole
Conduit

5. Remove the mounting screw and washers securing the control panel.
6. Tip the top of the control panel away from the main frame enough to release the two tabs

inserted into the base mounting slots and then pull it out of the base.
7. Carefully guide the control panel cable and the take-label sensor cable, if installed,

through their access holes.

8. Are you replacing a defective take-label sensor?

13291L-006 Rev. A

If...

Then...

Yes

Continue with Remove the Take-Label Sensor Board on page 251.

Go to Install the Take-Label Sensor Board on page 252.

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Take-Label Sensor

Remove the Take-Label Sensor Board

1. See Figure 105. Locate the take-label sensor board on the control panel.
2. Remove and discard the mounting screws and then lift the board out of the control panel

and discard it.

Figure 105 Remove and Install the Take-Label Sensor

1
2

5/4/11

Take-label sensor board

Mounting screws (2)

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

251

252

Corrective Maintenance
Take-Label Sensor

Install the Take-Label Sensor Board

1. See Figure 106 and Figure 107. Align the take-label sensor board with the two guide posts

and install it on the posts, ensuring the posts are inserted in the board.
Figure 106 Install the Take-Label Sensor Board
1

2
3

1
2
3
4

13291L-006 Rev. A

Control panel
Take-label sensor board
Mounting screws (2)
Guide posts (2)

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Take-Label Sensor

Figure 107 Install the Take-Label Sensor Board on the Mounting Posts
1

1
2

Mounting posts (2)

Screw holes (2)

2. Install the two mounting screws supplied in the kit.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

253

254

Corrective Maintenance
Take-Label Sensor

Reinstall the Control Panel

1. Tip the top of the control panel away from the main frame and insert the two tabs in the

mounting slots in the base.

Figure 108 Install the Control Panel in the Base
3
1

4
2

6
5

1
3

1
2
3
4
5
6

Base
Control panel
Notch
Tabs (2)
Access holes (2)
Slots (2)

2. See Figure 104 on page 250. Guide the control panel cable through the access hole in the

front of the main frame. Connect it to J2 on the MLB.

3. Guide the take-label sensor cable around and through the lower access hole in the main

frame.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Take-Label Sensor

4. Route the take-label sensor cable through the conduit and then connect it to J19 on the

MLB.
5. See Figure 108. Tip the top of the control panel toward the main frame. Ensure that the

take-label sensor cable is in the notch in the control panel and between the main frame and
the platen roller housing leg.
6. See Figure 104 on page 250. Install the screw and washer to secure the control panel to the

main frame.

Reinstall the Electronics Cover

1. SSee Figure 103 on page 249. Install the cover by aligning it and sliding down, ensuring

the lower tabs are inside the base and the upper flanges are between the main frame and
the media door.
2. Install the four mounting screws on the back of the printer.
3. See Figure 102 on page 248. Open the media door and install the mounting screw and

washer to secure the electronics cover.

4. Reinstall the media and ribbon.
5. Reconnect the AC power cord and data cables.
6. Turn on (l) the printer.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

255

256

Corrective Maintenance
Take-Label Sensor

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Drive System

This section provides replacement and installation procedures for the printers drive system.

Contents
Ribbon Supply Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Media Hanger Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stepper Motor and Gear/Pulley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ribbon Take-Up Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ribbon Take-Up Spindle Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peel-Off/Tear-Off Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peel Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cutter Option Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cutter Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Static Brush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dancer Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outer Media Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

258
270
277
282
292
301
305
322
334
344
347
351

13291L-006 Rev. A

258

Corrective Maintenance
Ribbon Supply Spindle

Ribbon Supply Spindle

This procedure is for installing the ribbon supply spindle into the S4M printer. Read these
instructions thoroughly before performing this procedure.

Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Phillips Screwdriver Set

Standard Nutdriver Set

Standard Hex Key (Allen Wrench) Set Antistatic Wriststrap and Mat
Metric Hex Key (Allen Wrench) Set

Metric Nutdriver Set

Standard Open-End Wrench Set

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1.

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.
2.

Caution While performing any tasks near an open printhead, remove all rings,
watches, hanging necklaces, identification badges, or other metallic objects that could
touch the printhead.

Open the media door and remove the media and ribbon.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Ribbon Supply Spindle

3. See Figure 109. Remove the screw and washer securing the electronics cover.

Figure 109 Locate the Electronics Cover Mounting Screw

1
2
3
4
5
6

Electronics cover
Media cover
Upper flange
Mounting screw
Lock washer
Lower flange

4. See Figure 110. Remove the electronics cover by pressing in on the electronics cover with

the palm of your hand, and then lifting up on the cover.

Figure 110 Remove the Electronics Cover
2

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

259

260

Corrective Maintenance
Remove the Old Ribbon Supply Spindle

Remove the Old Ribbon Supply Spindle

1.
2. See Figure 110 on page 259. Install the electronics cover by aligning it and sliding down,

ensuring the lower flange is inside the base and the upper flange is between the main
frame and the media door.
3. See Figure 109 on page 259. Open the media door.
4. Reinstall the electronics cover mounting screw and lock washer.

Remove the Electronics Cover

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1.

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.
2.

Caution While performing any tasks near an open printhead, remove all rings,
watches, hanging necklaces, identification badges, or other metallic objects that could
touch the printhead.

Remove the media and ribbon.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Remove the Old Ribbon Supply Spindle

3. See Figure 111. Remove the electronics cover mounting screw and washer, and then close

the media door.

Figure 111 Remove the Mounting Screw
1

2
3

1
2
3
4

5/4/11

Media door
Electronics cover upper flange
Electronics cover mounting screw
Washer

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

261

262

Corrective Maintenance
Remove the Old Ribbon Supply Spindle

4. See Figure 112. Remove the four remaining mounting screws securing the electronics

cover.
5. Remove the electronics cover by lifting straight up on the bottom lip of the electronics

cover.
Figure 112 Remove the Electronics Cover

1
2

13291L-006 Rev. A

Electronics cover
Mounting screws (4)

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Remove the Old Ribbon Supply Spindle

Remove the Stepper Motor

Caution Observe proper electrostatic safety precautions when handling

static-sensitive components such as circuit boards and printheads.

Connect yourself to an antistatic device.

2. See Figure 113. Locate the stepper motor and drive belt.

Figure 113 Locate Drive System Components

6
1
2
3
4
5
6

MLB J9
Stepper motor
Drive belt
Platen pulley
Locking screw
Pivot screw

3. Disconnect the stepper motor cable from J9 on the main logic board (MLB).
4. Remove the locking screw and nut.
5. Remove the pivot screw.

5/4/11

Remove the stepper motor.

Remove the drive belt.

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

263

Corrective Maintenance
Remove the Old Ribbon Supply Spindle

Remove the Main Logic Board (MLB)

Caution Observe proper electrostatic safety precautions when handling

static-sensitive components such as circuit boards and printheads.

Connect yourself to an antistatic device.

2. See Figure 114. Remove all cables from the main logic board (MLB).

Note Take note of the location of all cables on the main logic board.

Figure 114 Remove the Main Logic Board Cables

3
6
11

4
5

10
7

F6
LF 1A

264

13291L-006 Rev. A

1
2
3
4

Printhead data (J3)

Power-in (J8)
Front panel (J2)
Stepper motor (J9)

7
8
9
10

5
6

Booster board (J7)

Ribbon sensor/head open
(P4)

11
12

S4M Maintenance Manual

Transmissive sensor (P9)

Reflective sensor (P7)
Take label sensor (J19)
Communication expansion
port (J17)
USB port (J14)
Serial port (J10)

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Remove the Old Ribbon Supply Spindle

3. See Figure 115. Remove the six screws and one nut securing the main logic board to the

frame of the printer.

4. Remove the two studs and washers securing the serial port connector to the back of the

printer.
Figure 115 Remove the Main Logic Board

4
2
3
1
2
3
4

Main logic board mounting nut

Main logic board mounting screws (6)
Main logic board
Serial port mounting studs (2)

5. Remove the main logic board from the printer.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

265

266

Corrective Maintenance
Remove the Old Ribbon Supply Spindle

6. See Figure 116. Remove the intermediate gear and mounting screw.

Figure 116 Remove the Intermediate Gear

Intermediate Gear

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Remove the Old Ribbon Supply Spindle

Remove the Old Ribbon Supply Spindle

1. See Figure 117. Remove the ribbon supply spindle mounting screw and washer.

Figure 117 Remove the Ribbon Supply Spindle Mounting Screw

2
1
2

Ribbon spindle mounting screw

Ribbon spindle mounting washer

2. Push the spindle out of the main frame.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

267

268

Corrective Maintenance
Remove the Old Ribbon Supply Spindle

Install the New Ribbon Supply Spindle Assembly

1. See Figure 118. Install the thin washer onto the spindle shaft.

Figure 118 Install the Thin Washer

1
2

Thin washer
Ribbon supply spindle shaft

2. Push the new ribbon spindle into the printer main frame.
3. Reinstall the spindle mounting screw and washer previously removed.
4. See Figure 116 on page 266. Reinstall the intermediate gear, ensuring the gears mesh

properly.
5. While lifting up on the stepper motor, reinstall the drive belt. Release the stepper motor to

provide tension on the belt.

6. Ensure the belt tension is correct and tighten the locking screw to secure the motor.
7. Tighten the pivot screw.
8. See Figure 115 on page 265. Reinstall main logic board in the printer using the screws,

nut, studs, and washers previously removed.

9. See Figure 114 on page 264. Reconnect all the cables previously removed from the main

logic board. Visually inspect and ensure the cables are in their proper location and seated
in the connectors.
10. See your User Guide. Set the tension on the ribbon supply spindle to either the high or low

setting depending on the width of the ribbon.

Note If your ribbon is wide, use the high tension setting. If you experience ribbon

slippage, use the low tension setting.

Reinstall the Electronics Cover

1. See Figure 112 on page 262. Install the cover by aligning it and sliding down, ensuring the

lower tabs are inside the base and the upper flanges are between the main frame and the
media door.
2. Install the four mounting screws on the back of the printer.
13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Remove the Old Ribbon Supply Spindle

Caution When you are loading media or ribbon, remove all jewelry that could come
into contact with the printhead or other printer parts.

See Figure 111 on page 261. Reopen the media cover and install the mounting screw and
washer.
4. Reconnect AC power cord and data cables.
5. Turn on (l) the printer

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

269

270

Corrective Maintenance
Media Hanger Assembly

Media Hanger Assembly

This procedure is for installing the media hanger assembly into the S4M printer. Read these
instructions thoroughly before performing this procedure.
Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Phillips Screwdriver Set

Anti-Static Wriststrap and Mat

Metric Nutdriver Set

Remove the Electronics Cover

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1. Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Media Hanger Assembly

2. See Figure 119. Remove the electronics cover mounting screw and washer and then close

the media door.

Figure 119 Remove the Mounting Screw
1

2
3

1
2
3
4

5/4/11

Media Door
Electronics Cover Upper Flange
Electronics Cover Mounting Screw
Washer

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

271

272

Corrective Maintenance
Media Hanger Assembly

3. See Figure 120. Remove the four remaining mounting screws securing the electronics

cover.
4. Remove the electronics cover by lifting straight up on the bottom lip of the electronics

cover.
Figure 120 Electronics Cover Removal

1
2

13291L-006 Rev. A

Electronics Cover
Mounting Screws (4)

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Media Hanger Assembly

Remove the Main Logic Board

Caution Observe proper electrostatic safety precautions when handling

static-sensitive components such as circuit boards and printheads.

Connect yourself to an antistatic device.

2. Open the media door and remove the media and ribbon
3. See Figure 121. On the electronics side, disconnect all cables from the main logic board.

Note Take note of the orientation of all cables on the main logic board.

Figure 121 Disconnect the Main Logic Board Connections

12
3
2
6
11

5
7

LF 1A

5/4/11

1
2
3
4

Printhead data (J3)

Power-in (J8)
Front panel (J2)
Stepper motor (J9)

7
8
9
10

5
6

Booster board (J7)

Ribbon sensor/head open (P4)

11
12

S4M Maintenance Manual

Transmissive sensor (P9)

Reflective sensor (P7)
Take-label sensor (J19)
Communication expansion port
(J17)
USB port (J14)
Serial port (J10)

13291L-006 Rev. A

273

274

Corrective Maintenance
Media Hanger Assembly

4. See Figure 122. Remove the six screws and one nut securing the main logic board to the

back of the printer.

5. Remove the two studs and washers securing the serial port connector to the printer.

Figure 122 Remove the Main Logic Board

5 4
2

3
1
2
3
4
4

Main logic board nut

Main logic board mounting screws (6)
Main logic board (MLB)
Lock washers (2)
Serial port mounting studs (2)

6. Remove the main logic board from the printer.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Media Hanger Assembly

7. See Figure 123. Remove the four hanger mounting screws and then remove the hanger

from the printer.

Figure 123 Remove/Install the Hanger Assembly
1

1
2

Hanger assembly mounting screws (4)

Hanger assembly

Install the New Hanger Assembly

1. See Figure 123. Install the new hanger assembly using the four mounting screws removed

previously.

Reinstall the MLB

1. See Figure 122 on page 274. Install the main logic board in the printer using the six

mounting screws and one nut removed previously.

2. Reinstall the two studs and washers securing the serial port.
3. See Figure 121 on page 273. Reconnect all the cables previously disconnected from the

main logic board. Visually inspect and ensure the cables are in their proper location and
seated in the connectors.
4. See Figure 30 on page 149. Install the cover by aligning it and sliding down, ensuring the

lower tabs are inside the base and the upper flanges are between the main frame and the
media door.
5. Install the four mounting screws on the back of the printer.
6. See Figure 29 on page 148. Open the media door and install the mounting screw and

washer to secure the electronics cover.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

275

276

Corrective Maintenance
Media Hanger Assembly

Reinstall the Electronics Cover

1. See Figure 120 on page 272. Install the cover by aligning it and sliding down, ensuring the

lower tabs are inside the base and the upper flanges are between the main frame and the
media door.
2. Install the four mounting screws on the back of the printer.
3.

Caution When you are loading media or ribbon, remove all jewelry that could come
into contact with the printhead or other printer parts.

See Figure 119 on page 271. Reopen the media cover and install the mounting screw and
washer.
4. Reconnect the AC power cord and data cables.
5. Turn on (l) the printer.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Stepper Motor and Gear/Pulley

Stepper Motor and Gear/Pulley

This procedure is for installing the stepper motor and gear/pulley in the S4M printer. Read
these instructions thoroughly before performing this procedure.
Caution Turn Off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Phillips Screwdriver Set

Anti-Static Wriststrap and Mat

Metric Hex Key (Allen Wrench) Set

Metric Nutdriver Set

Remove the Electronics Cover

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1.

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.
2.

Caution While performing any tasks near an open printhead, remove all rings,
watches, hanging necklaces, identification badges, or other metallic objects that could
touch the printhead.

Remove the media and ribbon.

3. See Figure 124. Remove the electronics cover mounting screw and washer, and then close

the media door.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

277

278

Corrective Maintenance
Stepper Motor and Gear/Pulley

Figure 124 Remove the Mounting Screw

2
3

1
2
3
4

Media door
Electronics cover upper flange
Electronics cover mounting screw
Washer

4. See Figure 125. Remove the four remaining mounting screws securing the electronics

cover.
5. Remove the electronics cover by lifting straight up on the bottom lip of the electronics

cover.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Stepper Motor and Gear/Pulley

Figure 125 Remove the Electronics Cover

1
2

5/4/11

Electronics cover
Mounting screws (4)

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

279

280

Corrective Maintenance
Stepper Motor and Gear/Pulley

Remove the Old Stepper Motor

Caution Observe proper electrostatic safety precautions when handling

static-sensitive components such as circuit boards and printheads.

Connect yourself to an antistatic device.

2. See Figure 126. Locate the stepper motor and drive belt.

Figure 126 Locate Drive System Components

6
1
2
3
4
5
6

MLB J9
Stepper motor
Drive belt
Platen pulley
Locking screw
Pivot screw

3. Disconnect the stepper motor cable from the main logic board (MLB), J9.
4. Remove the locking screw and nut.
5. Remove the pivot screw and then remove the stepper motor.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Stepper Motor and Gear/Pulley

Install the New Stepper Motor and Gear

1. See Figure 126 on page 280. Install the stepper motor by sliding the gear/pulley through

the drive belt. Secure in position with the pivot screw, but do not tighten at this time.
2. Reinstall the locking screw and nut, but do not tighten at this time

Note Belt should deflect under finger pressure but no more than inch (6 mm).
3. Rotate the motor down until the drive belt is just taut. Tighten the locking screw and then

the pivot screw.

4. Connect the stepper motor power cable to J9 on the MLB.

Install the Electronics Cover

1. See Figure 30 on page 149. Install the cover by aligning it and sliding down, ensuring the

washer to secure the electronics cover.

4. Reinstall the media and ribbon.
5. Reconnect AC power cord and data cables.
6. Turn on (l) the printer.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

281

282

Corrective Maintenance
Ribbon Take-Up Spindle

Ribbon Take-Up Spindle

This procedure is for installing the Ribbon Take-Up Spindle into the S4M printer. Read these
instructions thoroughly performing this procedure.

Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Phillips Screwdriver Set

Antistatic Wriststrap and Mat

Metric Hex Key (Allen Wrench) Set

Metric and inch Feeler Gauges; must

include: 0.020 (0.508mm)

Metric Nutdriver Set

Remove the Electronics Cover

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Ribbon Take-Up Spindle

2. See Figure 127. Remove the electronics cover mounting screw and washer and then close

the media door.

Figure 127 Remove the Mounting Screw
1

1
2
3
4

5/4/11

Media door
Electronics cover upper flange
Electronics cover mounting screw
Washer

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

283

284

Corrective Maintenance
Ribbon Take-Up Spindle

3. See Figure 128. Remove the four remaining mounting screws securing the electronics

cover.
4. Remove the electronics cover by lifting straight up.

Figure 128 Electronics Cover Removal

1
2

13291L-006 Rev. A

Electronics cover
Mounting screws (4)

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Ribbon Take-Up Spindle

Remove the Main Logic Board

Caution Observe proper electrostatic safety precautions when handling

static-sensitive components such as circuit boards and printheads.

Connect yourself to an antistatic device.

2. See Figure 129. Remove all cables from the main logic board (MLB).

Note Take note of the location of all connectors on the main logic board.

Figure 129 Remove the Main Logic Board Connections

12
3
6
11

4
5

10
7

LF 1A

9
1
2
3
4
5
6

5/4/11

Printhead data (J3)

Power-in (J8)
Front panel (J2)
Stepper motor (J9)
Booster board (J7)
Ribbon sensor (P4)

7
8
9
10
11
12

S4M Maintenance Manual

Transmissive sensor (P9)

Reflective sensor (P7)
Take-label sensor (J19)
Communication expansion port (J17)
USB port (J14)
Serial port (J10)

13291L-006 Rev. A

285

286

Corrective Maintenance
Ribbon Take-Up Spindle

3. See Figure 130. Remove the six screws and one nut securing the main logic board to the

frame of the printer.

4. Remove the two studs and washers securing the serial port connector to the back of the

printer.
Figure 130 Remove the Main Logic Board

5 4
3
1
2
3
4
5

Main logic board nut (1)

Main logic board mounting screws (6)
Main logic board (MLB)
Lock washers (2)
Serial port mounting studs (2)

5. Remove the main logic board from the printer.

6. Do you have a wireless option board installed?

13291L-006 Rev. A

Then

Go to Remove the Old Ribbon Take-up Spindle Assembly on page 288.

Yes

Continue to See Figure 131. Remove the two mounting screws securing the
wireless board to the back cover. on page 287.

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Ribbon Take-Up Spindle

Remove the Wireless Option Board

1. See Figure 131. Remove the two mounting screws securing the wireless board to the back

cover.
Figure 131 Remove Wireless Board
2

1
3

5
1
2
3
4
5

Mounting screws (2)

Mounting bracket
Wireless option board
Upper mounting standoff
Lower mounting standoff

2. Remove the upper mounting standoff.

3. Remove the lower mounting standoff.
4. Remove the wireless board and set it aside on the antistatic mat.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

287

288

Corrective Maintenance
Ribbon Take-Up Spindle

Remove the Old Ribbon Take-up Spindle Assembly

1. See Figure 132. Remove the top mounting screw for the bracket and then loosen the

bottom screw.
2. Move the mounting bracket to gain access to the ribbon take-up spindle clutch gear.

Figure 132 Move the Mounting Bracket

1
2
3
4

Bracket
Intermediate gear
Mounting screw
Mark the outside of the compound gear.

3. Mark the compound gear with a marker so you will know the proper position of the gear.
4. Remove the compound gear mounting screw.
5. Remove the compound gear.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Ribbon Take-Up Spindle

6. See Figure 133. Loosen the two set screws on the ribbon take-up spindle collar and slide

the collar off of the shaft.

7. Remove the plastic thrust washer, bearing, and clutch gear assembly from the shaft of the

ribbon take-up spindle assembly.

Figure 133 Ribbon Take-Up Spindle Assembly/Disassembly
6
5
3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

5/4/11

Compound gear mounting screw

Compound gear
Collar
Clearance0.020 in. (0.508 mm)
Thrust washer
Clutch gear w/spring
Washer

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

289

290

Corrective Maintenance
Ribbon Take-Up Spindle

8. See Figure 134. From the media side, remove the ribbon take-up spindle assembly and

washer by sliding it out of the printer.

Figure 134 Assembly/Disassembly of the Ribbon Take-Up Spindle
8

7
6

5
4
2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Ribbon take-up spindle

Washer
Washer
Clutch gear
Spring
Thrust washer
Collar
Place a 0.020 in. (0.508 mm) feeler gauge between the thrust washer and
the collar.

Install the New Ribbon Take-Up Spindle Assembly

1. See Figure 134. Slide the washer removed previously onto the ribbon take-up spindle

assembly shaft.
2. On the media side, slide the ribbon take spindle shaft through the hole in the main frame.
3. On the electronics side, place the washer, gear clutch assembly, plastic thrust washer, and

collar onto the end of the ribbon take-up assembly shaft. Ensure the gear clutch assembly
gear meshes with the other compound gear.
4. Place a 0.020 in. (0.508 mm) feeler gauge between the thrust washer and the collar. From

the media side, push in on the ribbon take-up spindle. Tighten the two screws in the collar
and ensure the ribbon take-up spindle turns freely.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Ribbon Take-Up Spindle

Reinstall the MLB

1. See Figure 132 on page 288. Align the mounting bracket with the mounting hole and then

reinstall the top mounting screw.

2. Tighten the bottom mounting screw.
3. Did you remove a wireless option board?

Then

a. See Figure 130 on page 286. Reinstall the MLB.

b. See Figure 129 on page 285. Reconnect all cables to the MLB.

Yes

a. See Figure 130 on page 286. Reinstall the MLB.

b. See Figure 129 on page 285. Reconnect all cables to the MLB.
c. See Figure 131 on page 287. Reinstall the wireless option board.

Reinstall the Electronics Cover

1. See Figure 128 on page 284. Install the electronics cover by aligning it and sliding down,

ensuring the lower tabs are inside the base and the upper flange is between the main frame
and the media door.
2. Install the four mounting screws on the back of the printer.
3. See Figure 127 on page 283. Open the media door and install the mounting screw and lock

washer to secure the electronics cover.

Caution When you are loading media or ribbon, remove all jewelry that could come
into contact with the printhead or other printer parts.

Reinstall the media and ribbon.

5. Reconnect AC power cord and data cables.
6. Turn on (l) the printer.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

291

292

Corrective Maintenance
Ribbon Take-Up Spindle Clutch

Ribbon Take-Up Spindle Clutch

This procedure is for installing the Ribbon Take-up Spindle Clutch into the S4M printer. Read
these instructions thoroughly before performing this procedure.
Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Phillips Screwdriver Set

Antistatic Wriststrap and Mat

Metric Hex Key (Allen Wrench) Set

Safety Glasses

Metric Nutdriver Set

Metric and inch Feeler Gauges; must

include: 0.020 (.508mm)

Remove the Electronics Cover

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1.

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.
2.

Caution While performing any tasks near an open printhead, remove all rings,
watches, hanging necklaces, identification badges, or other metallic objects that could
touch the printhead.

Remove the media and ribbon.

3. See Figure 135. Remove the electronics cover mounting screw and washer, and then close

the media door.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Ribbon Take-Up Spindle Clutch

Figure 135 Remove the Mounting Screw

2
3

1
2
3
4

Media door
Electronics cover upper flange
Electronics cover mounting screw
Washer

4. See Figure 136. Remove the four remaining mounting screws securing the electronics

cover.
5. Remove the electronics cover by lifting straight up on the bottom lip of the electronics

cover.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

293

294

Corrective Maintenance
Ribbon Take-Up Spindle Clutch

Figure 136 Remove the Electronics Cover

1
2

Electronics cover
Mounting screws (4)

Remove the Main Logic Board

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1.

Caution Observe proper electrostatic safety precautions when handling

static-sensitive components such as circuit boards and printheads.

Connect yourself to an antistatic device.

2. See Figure 137. Remove all cables from the main logic board (MLB).

Note Take note of the location of all cables on the main logic board.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Ribbon Take-Up Spindle Clutch

Figure 137 Remove the Main Logic Board Connections

3
6
11

5
7

LF 1A

9
1
2
3
4
5
6

5/4/11

Printhead data (J3)

Power-in (J8)
Front panel (J2)
Stepper motor (J9)
Booster board (J7)
Ribbon sensor (P4)

7
8
9
10
11
12

S4M Maintenance Manual

Transmissive sensor (P9)

Reflective sensor (P7)
Take-label sensor (J19)
Communication expansion port (J17)
USB port (J14)
Serial port (J10)

13291L-006 Rev. A

295

296

Corrective Maintenance
Ribbon Take-Up Spindle Clutch

3. See Figure 138. Remove the six screws and one nut securing the main logic board to the

frame of the printer.

4. Remove the two studs and washers securing the serial port connector to the back of the

printer.
Figure 138 Remove the Main Logic Board

3
2

1
2
3
4

Main logic board nut (1)

Main logic board mounting screws (6)
Main logic board (MLB)
Serial port mounting studs (2)

5. Remove the main logic board from the printer.

6. Do you have a wireless option board installed?

13291L-006 Rev. A

Then

Go to See Figure 140. Remove the top mounting screw for the bracket and then
loosen the bottom screw. on page 298.

Yes

Continue with Remove the Wireless Board.

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Ribbon Take-Up Spindle Clutch

Remove the Wireless Board

1. See Figure 139. Remove the two mounting screws securing the wireless board to the back

cover.
Figure 139 Remove Wireless Board
2
3

6
1
2
3
4
5
6

Mounting screws (2)

Mounting bracket
Bracket mounting screw
Wireless Option Board
Upper mounting standoff
Lower mounting standoff

2. Remove the upper mounting standoff.

3. Remove the lower mounting standoff.
4. Remove the wireless board and set it on the antistatic mat.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

297

298

Corrective Maintenance
Ribbon Take-Up Spindle Clutch

Remove the Old Ribbon Take-up Spindle Clutch

1. See Figure 140. Remove the top mounting screw for the bracket and then loosen the

bottom screw.
2. Move the mounting bracket to gain access to the ribbon take-up spindle clutch gear.

Figure 140 Move the Mounting Bracket

1
2
3
4

Bracket
Intermediate gear
Mounting screw
Mark the outside of the compound gear.

3. Mark the compound gear with a marker so you will know the proper position of the gear.
4. Remove the compound gear mounting screw.
5. Remove the compound gear.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Ribbon Take-Up Spindle Clutch

Caution Wear protective eyewear when installing or removing E-rings, C-clips, snap
rings, springs, and mounting buttons. These are under tension and could fly off.

See Figure 141. Loosen the two set screws on the ribbon take-up spindle collar and slide
the collar off of the shaft.
7. Remove the plastic thrust washer, bearing, and clutch gear assembly from the shaft of the

ribbon take-up spindle assembly.

Figure 141 Ribbon Take-Up Spindle Assembly/Disassembly

6
5
3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Compound gear mounting screw

Compound gear
Collar
Clearance0.020 in. (0.508 mm)
Thrust washer
Clutch gear w/spring
Washer

Install the New Clutch Assembly

1. See Figure 141. Slide the clutch gear assembly, bearing, plastic thrust washer, and collar

onto the end of the ribbon take-up spindle assembly shaft. Ensure the clutch assembly gear
meshes with the compound gear.
2. Place a 0.020 in. (0.508 mm) feeler gauge between the thrust washer and the collar. From

the media side, push in on the ribbon take-up spindle. Tighten the two set screws in the
collar and ensure the ribbon take-up spindle turns freely.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

299

300

Corrective Maintenance
Ribbon Take-Up Spindle Clutch

Reinstall the Compound Gear

1. See Figure 141 on page 299. Reinstall the compound gear with your mark facing out.
2. See Figure 140 on page 298. Align the mounting bracket with the mounting hole and then

reinstall the top mounting screw.

3. Tighten the bottom mounting screw.
4. Do you have a wireless option card?

Then

Continue to See Figure 138 on page 296. Reinstall the MLB..

Yes

See Figure 139 on page 297. Reinstall the wireless option board.

Reinstall the MLB

1. See Figure 138 on page 296. Reinstall the MLB.
2. See Figure 137 on page 295. Reconnect all cables to the MLB.

Reinstall the Electronics Cover

1. See Figure 136 on page 294. Install the cover by aligning it and sliding down, ensuring the

lower tabs are inside the base and the upper flanges are between the main frame and the
media door.
2. Install the four mounting screws on the back of the printer.
3. See Figure 135 on page 293. Open the media door and install the mounting screw and

washer to secure the electronics cover.

4. Reinstall media and ribbon.
5. Reconnect AC power cord and data cables.
6. Turn on (l) the printer.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Peel-Off/Tear-Off Bar

Peel-Off/Tear-Off Bar
Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

2.5 mm Hex Key (Supplied)

Remove the Front Cover

1. Turn off (O) the printer and remove the AC power cord and data cables.
2.

Caution While performing any tasks near an open printhead, remove all rings,
watches, hanging necklaces, identification badges, or other metallic objects that could
touch the printhead.

Open the media door and remove the media and ribbon.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

301

302

Corrective Maintenance
Peel-Off/Tear-Off Bar

3. See Figure 142. Carefully remove the latch cover.

Using a small flat-blade screwdriver, pry the front cover off.

Figure 142 Remove the Latch and Front Covers
1

4
3
3

1
2
3
4

Media door
Latch cover
Front cover
Place flat-blade screwdriver here to pry off cover.

4. Continue with Replace the Peel-Off/Tear-Off Bar.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Peel-Off/Tear-Off Bar

Replace the Peel-Off/Tear-Off Bar

1. Remove the two peel-off/tear-off bar mounting screws.

Figure 143 Remove and Install the Peel-Off/Tear-Off Bar

1
2
3

Peel-off/tear-off bar
Peel-off/tear-off bar mounting screws (2)
Rest the bumps on the housing here

2. Lift the peel-off/tear-off bar out of the platen housing.

Install the New Peel-Off/Tear-Off Bar

1. Install the new peel-off/tear-off bar into the platen housing. Do not tighten the mounting

screws at this time.

Note You may find it is easier to insert the left side first.
2. Lift the peel-off/tear-off bar up slightly. Push the peel-off/tear-off bar back against the

horizontal mounting bar of the platen housing and then back down until the bumps are
resting on the mounting bar.
3. Tighten the mounting screws while keeping pressure down on the peel-off/tear-off bar.
4. See Figure 142 on page 302. Reinstall the front cover.
5. Reinstall the latch cover.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

303

304

Corrective Maintenance
Peel-Off/Tear-Off Bar

Caution When you are loading media or ribbon, remove all jewelry that could come
into contact with the printhead or other printer parts.

Reinstall the media and ribbon.

7. Reconnect the AC power cord.
8. Turn on (l) the printer.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Peel Option

Peel Option
This procedure is for installing the peel option into the S4M printer. Read these instructions
thoroughly before performing this procedure.

Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Phillips Screwdriver Set

Metric Hex Key (Allen Wrench) Set

Flat-Blade Screwdriver Set

Antistatic Mat and Wrist Strap

Remove the Front Cover

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.
2. Open the media door and remove the media and ribbon.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

305

306

Corrective Maintenance
Peel Option

3. See Figure 144. Carefully remove the latch cover.

4. Using a small flat-blade screwdriver, pry the front cover off.

Figure 144 Remove the Latch and Front Covers

4
3

1
2
3
4

Media door
Latch cover
Front cover
Use flat-blade screwdriver here

5. Reinstall the latch cover.

6. Do you have an existing peel option?

13291L-006 Rev. A

Then

Continue with Remove the Tear Bar.

Yes

Go to Remove the Peel Assembly on page 308.

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Peel Option

Remove the Tear Bar

1. See Figure 145. Remove the two tear bar mounting screws.

Figure 145 Remove the Tear Bar

1
2

Tear bar
Mounting screws (2)

2. Remove and discard the tear bar.

3. Go to Install the Peel Assembly on page 309.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

307

308

Corrective Maintenance
Peel Option

Remove the Peel Assembly

1. See Figure 146. Loosen the two mounting screws and then remove the peel assembly.

Figure 146 Remove Old Peel Assembly

1
2

13291L-006 Rev. A

Peel assembly
Mounting screws (2)

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Peel Option

Install the Peel Assembly

1. See Figure 147. Notice the pems and the mounting slots.

Figure 147 Rear View of Peel Assembly

2
1
2

5/4/11

Mounting slots (2)

Pems (2)

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

309

310

Corrective Maintenance
Peel Option

2. See Figure 148. Install the peel assembly with the pems to the rear and the opening in the

mounting slot to the top.

Insert the mounting slot opening over the two screws and lift up on the assembly.

Push the assembly back against the vertical surface of the platen housing, and then
down, so that the pems are resting on the horizontal surface of the platen housing.
Figure 148 Install Peel Assembly
3
4

1
2

1
2
3
4
5
6

Peel assembly
Mounting slots (2)
Mounting screws (2)
Platen housing
Rest pems on housing here
Peel lever

3. Maintain a slight pressure downward on the peel assembly to keep the pems on the

horizontal surface, and tighten the mounting screws.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Peel Option

Install the New Front Cover

1. See Figure 149. Insert the front cover mounting tabs through the mounting holes in the

base.
2. Install the two rivets though the two tabs and into the base mounting holes.

Figure 149 Install the Front Cover

3
2
1

1
2
3
4

Front cover
Push rivets (2)
Rivet closed
Rivet open

Remove the Electronics Cover

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1.

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

311

312

Corrective Maintenance
Peel Option

2. See Figure 150. Remove the electronics cover mounting screw and washer and then close

the media door.

Figure 150 Remove the Mounting Screw
1

1
2
3
4

13291L-006 Rev. A

Media door
Electronics cover upper flange
Electronics cover mounting screw
Washer

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Peel Option

3. See Figure 151. Remove the four remaining mounting screws securing the electronics

cover.
4. Remove the electronics cover by lifting straight up on the bottom lip of the electronics

cover.
Figure 151 Remove the Electronics Cover

1
2

5/4/11

Electronics cover
Mounting screws (4)

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

313

314

Corrective Maintenance
Peel Option

Remove the Control Panel

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1.

Caution Observe proper electrostatic safety precautions when handling

static-sensitive components such as circuit boards and printheads.

Connect yourself to an antistatic device.

2. See Figure 152. Disconnect the control panel ribbon cable from J2 on the main logic board

(MLB).
3. If installed, remove the take-label sensor cable from J19 on the MLB and then remove it

from the conduit.

Figure 152 Remove and Install the Control Panel
1

13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Main frame
Main logic board (MLB)
J19, Take-label sensor
Control panel cable
J2, Control panel
Mounting screw
Split washer

8
9
10
11
12
13

Star washer
Control panel
Tab
Cable access hole
Access hole
Conduit

4. Remove the mounting screw and washers securing the control panel.
5. Tip the top of the control panel away from the main frame enough to release the two tabs

inserted into the base mounting slots and then pull it out of the base.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Peel Option

6. Carefully guide the control panel cable and the take-label sensor cable, if installed,

through their access holes.

7. Are you replacing a defective take-label sensor?

If...

Then...

Yes

Continue with Remove the Take-Label Sensor Board.

Go to Install the Take-Label Sensor Board on page 316.

Remove the Take-Label Sensor Board

1. See Figure 153. Locate the take-label sensor board on the control panel.
2. Remove and discard the mounting screws and then lift the board out of the control panel

and discard it.

Figure 153 Remove and Install the Take-Label Sensor

1
2

5/4/11

Take-label sensor board

Mounting screws (2)

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

315

316

Corrective Maintenance
Peel Option

Install the Take-Label Sensor Board

1. See Figure 154 and Figure 155. Align the take-label sensor board with the two guide posts

and install it on the posts, ensuring the posts are inserted in the board.
Figure 154 Install the Take-Label Sensor Board
1

2
3

1
2
3
4

13291L-006 Rev. A

Control panel
Take-label sensor board
Mounting screws (2)
Guide posts (2)

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Peel Option

Figure 155 Install the Take-Label Sensor Board on the Mounting Posts
1

1
2

Mounting posts (2)

Screw holes (2)

2. Install the two mounting screws supplied in the kit.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

317

318

Corrective Maintenance
Peel Option

Reinstall the Control Panel

1. Tip the top of the control panel away from the main frame and insert the two tabs in the

access holes in the base.

Figure 156 Install the Control Panel in the Base
1

3
4
2
2

6
5
1
3

1
2
3
4
5
6

Base
Control panel
Notch
Tabs (2)
Access holes (2)
Slots (2)

2. See Figure 152 on page 314. Guide the control panel cable through the access hole in the

front of the main frame. Connect it to J2 on the MLB.

3. Guide the take-label sensor cable around and through the lower access hole in the main

frame.
4. Route the take-label sensor cable through the conduit and then connect it to J19 on the

MLB.
5. See Figure 156. Tip the top of the control panel toward the main frame until the tabs

engage the slots in the base. Ensure that the take-label sensor cable is in the notch in the
control panel and between the main frame and the platen roller housing leg.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Peel Option

6. See Figure 152 on page 314. Install the screw and washer to secure the control panel to the

main frame.

Reinstall the Electronics Cover

Caution When you are loading media or ribbon, remove all jewelry that could come
into contact with the printhead or other printer parts.

Reinstall the media and ribbon. Refer to the User Guide for additional information.
2. Reconnect the AC power cord and data cables.
3. Turn on (l) the printer.

Select the Peel Mode

1. Press MENU to enter the Setup Mode.
2. Use the left or right arrow to scroll through the parameters until REMOVAL is displayed.
3. Use the up or down arrow until PEEL is displayed.
4. Press MENU.

The printer displays SAVE CHANGES and activates the ENTER button.
5. Press ENTER.

The printer saves changes and exits Setup mode.

6. Are you shipping this printer?

5/4/11

Then

Installation is complete.

Yes

Continue with Install Repackaging Parts.

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

319

320

Corrective Maintenance
Peel Option

Install Repackaging Parts

These parts are to be installed when repackage the printer for shipping to a customer or another
location.
1. Open the media door and route the cable tie as shown and then tighten it.

Figure 157 Install the Repacking Cable Tie

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Peel Option

2. See Figure 158. Open the media door and slide the foam spacer between the peel assembly

handle and the print mechanism housing and then close the media door. The printer is
ready for repackaging.
Figure 158 Install the Foam Spacer

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

321

322

Corrective Maintenance
Cutter Option Kit

Cutter Option Kit

Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Phillips Screwdriver Set

Antistatic Wrist Strap and Mat

Flat-blade Screwdriver Set

47362* Zebra Preventive Maintenance

Kit

Needlenose Pliers

* In place of the Preventive Maintenance Kit, you may use a clean swab dipped in a solution of isopropyl
alcohol (minimum 90%) and deionized water (maximum 10%).

Remove the Electronics Cover

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1.

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.
2.

Caution While performing any tasks near an open printhead, remove all rings,
watches, hanging necklaces, identification badges, or other metallic objects that could
touch the printhead.

Remove the media and ribbon.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Cutter Option Kit

3. See Figure 159. Remove the electronics cover mounting screw and washer, and then close

the media door.

Figure 159 Remove the Mounting Screw
1

1
2
3

5/4/11

Media door
Electronics cover upper flange
Electronics cover mounting screw and washer

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

323

324

Corrective Maintenance
Cutter Option Kit

4. See Figure 160. Remove the four remaining mounting screws securing the electronics

cover.
5. Remove the electronics cover by lifting straight up on the bottom lip of the electronics

cover.
Figure 160 Remove the Electronics Cover
1

1
2

13291L-006 Rev. A

Electronics cover
Mounting screws (4)

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Cutter Option Kit

Remove the Old Cutter Assembly

Caution Observe proper electrostatic safety precautions when handling

static-sensitive components such as circuit boards and printheads.

Connect yourself to an antistatic device.

Caution The cutter blade is sharp. Do not touch or rub the blade with your fingers.

Remove the cutter assembly.

3. See Figure 161. Remove the cutter mounting screw.

Figure 161 Remove the Cutter Assembly

3
1
2
3
4
5

5/4/11

Cutter assembly
Mounting screw
Cutter harness
Cutter hanger bracket (2)
Cutter mounting bracket

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

325

326

Corrective Maintenance
Cutter Option Kit

4. See Figure 162. The two cutter assembly hanger brackets sit on two platen housing hooks.

Slide the cutter assembly slightly to the left and lift to remove from the platen hooks.
Figure 162 Platen Housing Hooks

1
2
3

Platen housing hook (shaded)

Cutter mounting hole
Main frame access hole

5. Using a pair of needlenose pliers and working from the back of the cutter assembly,

depress the tab and remove the cutter cable connector from J2 on the printed circuit board
inside the cutter assembly.
6. See Figure 162. Route the cutter cable back through the main frame access hole.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Cutter Option Kit

7. See Figure 163. Remove the cable from the insulation jacket.

Figure 163 MLB and Cable Routings

1
2

Insulation jacket (shown shaded)

Main logic board (MLB)

8. See Figure 164. Unplug the cable connector from J13 on the main logic board.

Figure 164 Main Logic Board Connections

1
1

5/4/11

J13 Cutter connector

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

327

328

Corrective Maintenance
Cutter Option Kit

9. Has your lower front trim been damaged?

Then

Skip to Install the New Cutter Assembly on page 329.

Yes

Continue with Remove the Lower Front Trim.

Remove the Lower Front Trim

1. See Figure 165. Remove the two push rivets securing the lower front trim and discard

them.
2. Slide the trim out from the printer base and discard.

Install Lower Front Trim

1. See Figure 165. Install the new lower trim piece, ensuring that the tabs slide into the slots

along the bottom edge of the printer.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Cutter Option Kit

Figure 165 Lower Front Trim and Push Rivets

5
7

6
2

3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Rivets (2)
Mounting holes (2)
Slots (2)
Lower front trim
Trim tabs (2)
Rivet (shown in closed position)
Rivet (shown in open position)

2. To secure the trim, perform the following:

Hold the trim in place with one hand.

Insert each of the two push rivets (provided in the kit) through the holes in the trim
and down through the mounting holes in the printer base.

Install the New Cutter Assembly

1. Plug the black cutter cable connector into J2 on the back of the cutter board assembly, if

required.
Verify that the connector is seated correctly.
2. See Figure 162. While holding the cutter assembly, route the cutter assembly cable

through the main frame access hole.

3. See Figure 162. Set the two small cutter hanger brackets on the two platen housing hooks.

Ensure the cutter assembly is seated on the hooks correctly.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

329

330

Corrective Maintenance
Cutter Option Kit

4. See Figure 162. Align the cutter mounting bracket tab behind the platen assembly (below

the printhead latch).

5. See Figure 166. Secure the cutter assembly to the platen assembly using the hex head

screw provided in the kit.

Figure 166 Exploded View of the Cutter Assembly

6
2
5
3

4
1
2
3
4
5
6

Cutter shield
Hanger bracket (2)
Hex head mounting screw
Mounting bracket tab
Cutter catch tray mounting slot
Thumbscrew

6. See Figure 166. If necessary, replace the cutter shield over the cutter assembly and secure

in place using the thumbscrew provided.

7. See Figure 161 on page 325. Place the catch tray in the slot on the front cover of the cutter

assembly.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Cutter Option Kit

8. Do you have two flat cable clamps attached to the base on the electronics side of the

printer?
If

Then

Yes, and both

clamps are in
good condition

Continue with step 9.

No, one clamp is

damaged or
missing

a. If necessary, remove the damaged clamp.

b. Determine the proper placement for the new clamp.
c. See Figure 167. Using the Preventive Maintenance Kit (part

number 47362*), clean the printer base to aid clamp adhesion at

the new location. To clean thoroughly, wipe firmly back and forth
several times in this location.
d. Remove the adhesive backing from the cable clamp provided in
the kit.
e. See Figure 167. Do one of the following:
For the first ribs clamp, place the open end of the cable
clamp against the first rib and about midway across the
electronics enclosure.
For the second ribs clamp, place the open end of the cable
clamp facing out toward the opening, at a 45 degree angle to
the second rib, and close to the edge of the printer.
f. Press down on the cable clamp for 2-3 seconds to ensure good
adhesion.
* Note: In place of Preventive Maintenance Kit, you may use a clean swab or a cloth dipped in a
solution of isopropyl alcohol (minimum 90%) and deionized water (maximum 10%).

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

331

332

Corrective Maintenance
Cutter Option Kit

Figure 167 Placement of Cable Clamp

4
1
2
3
4
5
6

Main frame access hole

Cable clamps (2)
Cutter cable
First rib
Insulation jacket
Second rib

9. From the electronics side, dress the cutter cable through the cable clamp.
10. See Figure 167. Insert the cable into the insulation jacket.
11. See Figure 164 on page 327. Plug the white cutter cable connector into J13 on the main

logic board.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Cutter Option Kit

Reinstall the Electronics Cover

Caution When you are loading media or ribbon, remove all jewelry that could come
into contact with the printhead or other printer parts.

Reinstall the media and ribbon.

2. Reconnect the AC power cord and data cables.
3. Turn on (l) the printer.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

333

334

Corrective Maintenance
Cutter Cover

Cutter Cover
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Phillips Screwdriver Set

Antistatic Wriststrap and Mat

Flat-blade Screwdriver Set

Metric Hex Key (Allen Wrench) Set

Remove the Electronics Cover

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1.

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.
2.

Caution While performing any tasks near an open printhead, remove all rings,
watches, hanging necklaces, identification badges, or other metallic objects that could
touch the printhead.

Remove the media and ribbon.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Cutter Cover

3. See Figure 168. Remove the electronics cover mounting screw and washer, and then close

the media door.

Figure 168 Remove the Mounting Screw
1

1
2
3

5/4/11

Media door
Electronics cover upper flange
Electronics cover mounting screw and washer

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

335

336

Corrective Maintenance
Cutter Cover

4. See Figure 169. Remove the four remaining mounting screws securing the electronics

cover.
5. Remove the electronics cover by lifting straight up on the bottom lip of the electronics

cover.
Figure 169 Remove the Electronics Cover
1

1
2

13291L-006 Rev. A

Electronics cover
Mounting screws (4)

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Cutter Cover

Remove the Cutter Module and Cutter Cover

Remove the Old Cutter Assembly
1.

Caution Observe proper electrostatic safety precautions when handling

static-sensitive components such as circuit boards and printheads.

Connect yourself to an antistatic device.

2. See Figure 170. Unplug the cutter cable connector from J13 on the main logic board.

Figure 170 Main Logic Board Connections

1
1

5/4/11

J13 Cutter

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

337

338

Corrective Maintenance
Cutter Cover

3. See Figure 171. Remove the cable from the insulation jacket and the flat cable clamp.

Figure 171 Placement of Cable Clamp

3
1
2
3
4

Main frame access hole

Flat cable clamp
Cutter cable
Insulation jacket

4. Route the cable through the main frame access hole into the media compartment.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Cutter Cover

Caution The cutter blade is sharp. Do not touch or rub the blade with your fingers.

See Figure 172. Remove the cutter mounting screw.

Figure 172 Remove the Cutter Assembly

3
1
2
3
4
5

Cutter assembly
Mounting screw
Cutter harness
Cutter hanger bracket (2)
Cutter mounting bracket

Note The cutter guard does not need to be removed from the cutter assembly during this

procedure.
6. Slide the cutter assembly slightly to the left and lift to remove from the platen hooks.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

339

340

Corrective Maintenance
Cutter Cover

Remove the Cutter Cover and PCB

1. See Figure 173. Remove the two screws securing the cutter assembly to the cutter cover

and PC board.
2. Disconnect the cutter motor cable at the printed circuit board (PCB).
3. Disconnect the harness assembly from the cutter assembly.
4. Route the cutter motor cable back through the main frame access hole.
5. Remove the cutter cable from the flat cable clamp and the insulation jacket.
6. Disconnect cutter motor cable from J13 on the MLB. Discard the old cable.

Figure 173 Remove the Cutter Cover

1
2

7
6

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Cutter cover/PCB
Cutter motor PCB connector
Cutter motor cable
Cutter assembly
Cover mounting screws (2)
Cutter harness assembly
J2 on Cutter PCB

Install the Cutter Cover and PCB

1. See Figure 173. Plug the black cutter cable connector into J2 on the back of the cutter

board assembly.
Verify that the connector is seated correctly.
2. Reconnect the cutter harness assembly.
3. Align the new cover and the cutter assembly.
4. Install the two screws to secure the parts together.
13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Cutter Cover

Install the New Cutter Assembly

1. See Figure 174. While holding the cutter assembly, route the cutter assembly cable

through the main frame access hole.

Figure 174 Platen Housing Hooks

1
2
3

Platen housing hook (shaded)

Cutter mounting hole
Main frame access hole

2. See Figure 174. Set the two small cutter hanger brackets on the two platen housing hooks.

Ensure the cutter assembly is seated on the hooks correctly.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

341

342

Corrective Maintenance
Cutter Cover

3. See Figure 174. Align the cutter mounting bracket tab behind the platen assembly (below

the printhead latch).

4. See Figure 174. Secure the cutter assembly to the platen assembly using the hex head

screw provided in the kit.

5. If necessary, replace the cutter shield over the cutter assembly and secure in place using

the thumb screw provided.

6. Place the catch tray in the slot on the front cover of the cutter assembly.
7. See Figure 175. Dress the cutter cable through the cable clamp.
8. See Figure 175. From the electronics side, insert the cable into the insulation jacket.

Figure 175 Placement of Cable Clamp

4
1
2
3
4
5

Main frame access hole

Cable clamp
Cutter cable
First rib
Insulation jacket

9. See Figure 170 on page 337. Plug the white cutter cable connector into J13 on the main

logic board.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Cutter Cover

Reinstall the Electronics Cover

1. See Figure 169 on page 336. Install the cover by aligning it and sliding down, ensuring the

lower tabs are inside the base and the upper flanges are between the main frame and the
media door.
2. Install the four mounting screws on the back of the printer.
3. See Figure 168 on page 335. Open the media door and install the mounting screw and

washer to secure the electronics cover.

Caution When you are loading media or ribbon, remove all jewelry that could come
into contact with the printhead or other printer parts.

Reinstall the media and ribbon.

5. Reconnect the AC power cord and data cables.
6. Turn on (l) the printer.

5/4/11

13291L-006 Rev. A

345

346

Corrective Maintenance
Static Brush

Install the New Static Brush Assembly

1. See Figure 176. Secure the new static brush assembly to the printer frame with two

mounting screws.
2.

Caution When you are loading media or ribbon, remove all jewelry that could come
into contact with the printhead or other printer parts.

Reinstall the ribbon and media and close the media cover.
3. Reconnect the AC power cord and data cables.
4. Turn on (l) the printer.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Dancer Assembly

Dancer Assembly
This procedure is for installing the dancer assembly in the printer. Read these instructions
thoroughly before performing this procedure.

Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Long Needle Nose Pliers

Safety Goggles

Flat-Blade Screwdriver Set

Remove the Old Dancer Assembly

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

347

348

Corrective Maintenance
Dancer Assembly

Caution While performing any tasks near an open printhead, remove all rings,
watches, hanging necklaces, identification badges, or other metallic objects that could
touch the printhead.

See Figure 177. Open the media door and remove the media and ribbon.
Figure 177 Open the Media Door

2
1
2

13291L-006 Rev. A

Media door
Dancer assembly

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Dancer Assembly

Caution Wear protective eyewear when installing or removing E-rings, C-clips, snap
rings, springs, and mounting buttons. These are under tension and could fly off.

See Figure 178. Using long needle nose pliers, move the torsion spring leg off the printer
post. This will relieve tension from the dancer assembly.
4. Remove the E-ring and then slide off the bearings, the dancer, and the torsion spring.
5. Go to Install the New Dancer Assembly on page 350.

Figure 178 Dancer Assembly

6
7

2
3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

5/4/11

Torsion spring
Dancer
E-ring
Flanged bearings (2)
E-ring (Z6Mplus only)
Printer post
Dancer tab

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

349

350

Corrective Maintenance
Dancer Assembly

Install the New Dancer Assembly

Caution Wear protective eyewear when installing or removing E-rings, C-clips, snap
rings, springs, and mounting buttons. These are under tension and could fly off.

See Figure 4. Install the new torsion spring, the first bearing, the dancer, the second
bearing, and finally the E-ring.
2. Return the dancer assembly torsion spring back to its operating position against the printer

post and dancer tab. Ensure there is tension on the dancer assembly.
3.

Caution When you are loading media or ribbon, remove all jewelry that could come
into contact with the printhead or other printer parts.

Reinstall media and ribbon, and then close the media door.
4. Reconnect the AC power cord and data cables.
5. Turn on (l) the printer.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Outer Media Guide

Outer Media Guide

Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Phillips Screwdriver, Stubby

Safety Goggles

Remove the Outer Media Guide

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.
2.

Caution While performing any tasks near an open printhead, remove all rings,
watches, hanging necklaces, identification badges, or other metallic objects that could
touch the printhead.

Open the media side cover and remove all media and ribbon from the printer.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

351

352

Corrective Maintenance
Outer Media Guide

Caution Wear protective eye wear when installing or removing E-rings, C-clips, snap
rings, springs, and mounting buttons. These are under tension and could fly off.

See Figure 179 and Figure 180. Remove the thumb nut or screw, washer, and spring.
4. Lift the outer media guide out of the platen housing.

Figure 179 Remove the Old Outer Media Guide

S4M

1
2

13291L-006 Rev. A

Outer media guide

Mounting nut or screw

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Outer Media Guide

Install the Outer Media Guide

1. See Figure 180. Place the new outer media guide in the platen assembly.
2. Install the spring and washer on the outer media guide screw.

Figure 180 Install the New Outer Media Guide

2
3
4

1
2
3
4

Outer media guide

Washer
Compression spring
Screw

3. Install the outer media guide thumb nut or screw, spring, and washer to secure the outer

media guide.
4.

Caution When you are loading media or ribbon, remove all jewelry that could come
into contact with the printhead or other printer parts.

Reinstall the media and ribbon and close the media door.
5. Reconnect the AC power cord.
6. Turn on (l) the printer.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

353

354

Corrective Maintenance
Outer Media Guide

Notes ___________________________________________________________________

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Roller System

This section provides replacement and installation procedures for the S4M roller system.

Contents
Platen Roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Pinch Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

356

Corrective Maintenance
Platen Roller

Platen Roller
Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Phillips Screwdriver Set

Needle Nose Pliers

Flat-blade Screwdriver Set

Safety Goggles

Metric Hex Key (Allen Wrench) Set

Remove the Electronics Cover

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1.

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.
2.

Caution While performing any tasks near an open printhead, remove all rings,
watches, hanging necklaces, identification badges, or other metallic objects that could
touch the printhead.

Remove the media and ribbon.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Platen Roller

3. See Figure 181. Remove the electronics cover mounting screw and washer, and then close

the media door.

Figure 181 Remove the Mounting Screw
1

2
3

1
2
3
4

5/4/11

Media door
Electronics cover upper flange
Electronics cover mounting screw
Washer

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

357

358

Corrective Maintenance
Platen Roller

4. See Figure 182. Remove the four remaining mounting screws securing the electronics

cover.
5. Remove the electronics cover by lifting straight up on the bottom lip of the electronics

cover.
Figure 182 Remove the Electronics Cover

1
2

13291L-006 Rev. A

Electronics cover
Mounting screws (4)

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Platen Roller

Remove the Platen Roller Pulley and Belt

1. See Figure 183. Loosen the stepper motor locking screw and pivot screw.

Figure 183 Stepper Motor Pivot Screw and Locking Screw

5
6

1
2
3
4
5
6

Stepper motor
Pivot screw
Belt
Platen pulley
Platen pulley set screws (2)
Locking screw

2. Pivot up the stepper motor and remove the drive belt.

Note Make a note of the orientation of the platen pulley and around which section of the

platen pulley the belt is installed.

3. Loosen the two set screws on the platen pulley.
4. Remove the pulley and belt from the platen roller shaft.
5. Do you have a peel printer?

5/4/11

Then

Go to Remove the Front Cover on page 361.

Yes

Continue to Remove the Peel Assembly.

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

359

360

Corrective Maintenance
Platen Roller

Remove the Peel Assembly

1. See Figure 184. Remove the two mounting screws and remove the peel assembly.

Figure 184 Remove Peel Assembly

1
2

Peel assembly
Mounting screws (2)

2. Go to Remove the Platen Roller on page 363.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Platen Roller

Remove the Front Cover

1. See Figure 185. Using a small flat-blade screwdriver pry on the tabs to the front cover off.
2. Remove the latch cover by putting a small screwdriver under either side edge and pry out.

Figure 185 Remove the Lower Front Cover

2
1
2
3

5/4/11

Latch cover
Lower front cover
Tabs (2)

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

361

362

Corrective Maintenance
Platen Roller

3. See Figure 187. Remove the two mounting screws securing the tear bar, and then remove

it.
4. Note the orientation and location of the tear bar; there are several incorrect ways to

reinstall the tear bar. Using a marker, label the Up and Out areas.
Figure 186 Remove the Tear Bar and Latch Cover

2
3
1
2
3

13291L-006 Rev. A

Tear bar
Mounting screws (2)
Latch cover

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Platen Roller

Remove the Platen Roller

Caution Wear protective eye wear when installing or removing E-rings, C-clips, snap
rings, springs, and mounting buttons. These are under tension and could fly off.

See Figure 187. Using two flatblade screwdrivers or a pair of needle-nose pliers, squeeze
and push up on the barbed legs of the outboard spring clip to disengage it from the platen
housing.
2.

Caution While performing any tasks near an open printhead, remove all rings,
watches, hanging necklaces, identification badges, or other metallic objects that could
touch the printhead.

Remove the media and ribbon.

Note You do not need to remove the inner clip at this time.

Figure 187 Spring Clip Removal

1
3

1
2
3

5/4/11

2
3

Clip
Cut-out
Barbed legs (2)

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

363

364

Corrective Maintenance
Platen Roller

3. Locate the circular cut-out on the top of the outer spring clip, insert a screwdriver, and

then gently pry up and remove the clip.

Note If needed, loosen the inboard clip using the same procedure.
4. See Figure 188. Remove and discard the platen roller and bearings.

Figure 188 Remove the Platen Roller and Bearings

1
2
3
4

13291L-006 Rev. A

Bearings (2)
Inboard clip
Outboard clip
Wave washer

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Platen Roller

Install the New Platen Roller

Caution Wear protective eye wear when installing or removing E-rings, C-clips, snap
rings, springs, and mounting buttons. These are under tension and could fly off.

See Figure 188 on page 364. If you removed, insert a new spring clip part way into the
inboard platen housing.
Note The flat side of the bearing must face up.
2. Install the inboard bearing on the inboard platen shaft.
3. Insert the platen shaft through the inboard clip.
a.

Start the new inboard bearing into the clip.

Work the inboard bearing back and forth until the bearing is up against the clip.The
round side of the bearing goes down into the housing.

4. Once the inboard bearing is fully against the clip, angle up the outboard end of the platen

just enough to slide on the wave washer and outboard bearing. Seat the platen roller and
bearings in the platen housing.
5. Verify that the bearings are seated in the housing with the flat side up.
6. Position the outer clip straight over the circular part of the outboard bearing.
7. With a pair of pliers or other small tool, lightly tap in a downward motion on the spring

clips until they completely seat (snap) into the housing.

8. Does your printer have a tear bar?

Then

Continue to step 9.

Yes

a. See Figure 186 on page 362. Reinstall the tear bar.

b. See Figure 185 on page 361 and reinstall the lower front cover and latch

cover.
c. Continue to step 9.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

365

366

Corrective Maintenance
Platen Roller

9. See Figure 189. Orient the compound pulley belt in the correct pulley position as noted in

step 2 on page 359 and then reinstall the belt around the original pulley.
Figure 189 Select the Orientation of the Compound Pulley

200 dpi

300 dpi

10. See Figure 190. Slide the pulley onto the platen pulley shaft in the proper orientation and

align the set screws with the flat spots on the platen roller shaft.
Figure 190 Align Flat Spots on the Shaft
1
2

1
2

Set screws (2)

Platen roller shaft flat spots

11. Leave approximately 1/32 in. (0.80 mm) from the main frame and tighten the set screws.
12. Reinstall the belt around the platen pulley and the stepper motor pulley.
13.

Caution Do not over tighten the drive belt, or damage to the bearings and platen
roller will occur. The belt should deflect under finger pressure but no more than inch
(6 mm).

Rotate the motor down until the drive belt is just taut. Tighten the locking screw and then
the pivot screw.
14. Did you remove a peel assembly?

13291L-006 Rev. A

Then

Go to Reinstall the Electronics Cover on page 369.

Yes

Continue with Reinstall the Peel Assembly on page 367.

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Platen Roller

Reinstall the Peel Assembly

1. See Figure 191. Install the two mounting screws into the tear bar mounting screw holes.

Tighten the screws until they are within 1/8 in. of the platen housing.
Figure 191 Install Peel Assembly
3

1
2

1
2
3
4
5
6

5/4/11

Peel assembly
Mounting slots (2)
Mounting screws (2)
Platen housing
Rest Pems on housing here.
Peel lever

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

367

368

Corrective Maintenance
Platen Roller

2. See Figure 192. Notice the pems and the mounting slots.

Figure 192 Rear View of Peel Assembly

1
2

Mounting slots (2)

Pems (2)

3. See Figure 191 on page 367. Install the peel assembly with the pems to the rear and the

opening in the mounting slot to the top.

Insert the mounting slot opening over the two screws and lift up on the assembly.

Push the assembly back against the vertical surface of the platen housing and then
down, so that the pems are resting on the horizontal surface of the platen housing.

4. Apply a slight downward pressure on the peel assembly to keep the pems on the horizontal

surface, and then tighten the mounting screws.

5. Reinstall the latch cover.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Platen Roller

Reinstall the Electronics Cover

1. See Figure 182 on page 358. Install the cover by aligning it and sliding down, ensuring the

lower tabs are inside the base and the upper flanges are between the main frame and the
media door.
2. Install the four mounting screws on the back of the printer.
3. See Figure 181 on page 357. Open the media door and install the mounting screw and

washer to secure the electronics cover.

Caution While performing any tasks near an open printhead, remove all rings,
watches, hanging necklaces, identification badges, or other metallic objects that could
touch the printhead.

Reload the media into the printer.

5. Reconnect the AC power cord and data cables.
6. Turn on (l) the printer.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

369

370

Correective Maintenance
Pinch Roller

Pinch Roller
Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Flat-blade Screwdriver Set

Safety Goggles

Metric Hex Key (Allen Wrench) Set

Remove the Pinch Roller

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.
2.

Caution While performing any tasks near an open printhead, remove all rings,
watches, hanging necklaces, identification badges, or other metallic objects that could
touch the printhead.

Open the media door and remove media and ribbon from the printer.
3. See Figure 195. Lower the pinch roller holder assembly to the open position.
4.

Caution Wear protective eyewear when installing or removing E-rings, C-clips, snap
rings, springs, and mounting buttons. These are under tension and could fly off.

See Figure 193. Using a small flat blade screwdriver or an awl, remove and discard the
two E-rings.
Note If you have trouble reaching the E-rings and have a peel assembly installed, you

may have to remove it to access the E-rings. See Figure 195. Loosen the two mounting
screws, and then remove the peel assembly from the printer.
5. Remove and discard the bearings and old pinch roller.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Correective Maintenance
Pinch Roller

Figure 193 Removing and Installing E-rings and Bearings

6
1

Groove for E-ring

E-rings
(2 used, 2 spares)
Roller bearings (2)

Pinch roller

Pinch roller mounting

hole
Pinch roller holder
assembly

nstall the Pinch Roller

1. See Figure 193. Install the new pinch roller in the notches in the pinch roller holder

assembly.
2. Install the two new bearings on the shaft of the pinch roller, flange facing out, as shown.
3. Install two new E-rings in the grooves on the roller shaft.
4. See Figure 194. Notice the pems and the mounting slots.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

371

372

Correective Maintenance
Pinch Roller

Figure 194 Rear View of Peel Assembly

2
1
2

Mounting slots (2)

Pems (2)

5. See Figure 195. Remove the old tear bar by removing the two mounting screw. Reinstall

the them into the mounting holes, to within 3.175 mm of the platen housing.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Correective Maintenance
Pinch Roller

Figure 195 Installing Peel Roller Assembly

2
3
1

5
4

1
2
3
4
5
6

Peel assembly
Tear bar
Mounting screw
Mounting holes
Pinch roller
Rest the pems on the housing here.

6. Install the peel assembly with the pems to the rear and the opening in the mounting slot to

the top.
a.

Insert the mounting slot opening over the two screws and lift up on the assembly.

Push the assembly back against the vertical surface of the platen housing then down,
so that the pems are resting on the horizontal surface of the platen housing.

7. Maintain a slight downward pressure on the peel assembly to keep the pems on the

horizontal surface, and tighten the mounting screws.

8. Raise the pinch roller assembly to the closed position. Ensure the pinch holder assembly

snaps into position and exerts force on the platen roller.

Caution When you are loading media or ribbon, remove all jewelry that could come
into contact with the printhead or other printer parts.

Reinstall the media and ribbon.

10. Reconnect the AC power cord and turn on (l) the printer.
11. Verify proper printer operation.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

373

374

Correective Maintenance
Pinch Roller

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Printed Circuit Boards

This section provides replacement and installation procedures for the various printed circuit
boards and power systems in the S4M printer.

Contents
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Main Logic Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Main Logic Board Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Real Time Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Booster Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Early 10/100 Internal ZebraNet PrintServer, Wireless Print Server Plus, Parallel Port, and
No Comm Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
ZebraNet b/g Print Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
ZebraNet b/g Print Server Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Current 10/100 Internal ZebraNet Print Server Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

376

Corrective Maintenance
Control Panel

Control Panel
This procedure is for installing the control panel in the S4M printer. Read these instructions
thoroughly before performing this procedure.

Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Phillips Screwdriver Set

Anti-Static Wriststrap and Mat

Metric Nutdriver Set

Remove the Electronics Cover

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1.

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.
2.

Caution While performing any tasks near an open printhead, remove all rings,
watches, hanging necklaces, identification badges, or other metallic objects that could
touch the printhead.

Remove the media and ribbon.

3. See Figure 196. Remove the electronics cover mounting screw and washer, and then close

the media door.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Control Panel

Figure 196 Remove the Mounting Screw

2
3

1
2
3
4

Media door
Electronics cover upper flange
Electronics cover mounting screw
Washer

4. See Figure 197. Remove the four remaining mounting screws securing the electronics

cover.
5. Remove the electronics cover by lifting straight up on the bottom lip of the electronics

cover.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

377

378

Corrective Maintenance
Control Panel

Figure 197 Remove the Electronics Cover

1
2

13291L-006 Rev. A

Electronics cover
Mounting screws (4)

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Control Panel

Remove the Old Control Panel

Caution Observe proper electrostatic safety precautions when handling

static-sensitive components such as circuit boards and printheads.

Connect yourself to an antistatic device.

2. See Figure 198. Disconnect the control panel ribbon cable from J2 on the main logic board

(MLB).
3. If installed, remove the take-label sensor cable from J19 on the MLB and then remove the

cable from the conduit.

Figure 198 Remove and Install the Control Panel
1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Main frame
Main logic board (MLB)
J19
Control panel cable
J2
Mounting screw
Split washer

8
9
10
11
12
13

Star washer
Control panel
Tab
Cable access hole
Access hole
Conduit

4. Remove the mounting screw and washers securing the control panel.
5. Tip the top of the control panel away from the main frame enough to release the two tabs

inserted into the base. Pull the control panel out of the base.
6. Carefully guide the control panel cable and the take-label sensor cable, if installed,

through their access holes.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

379

380

Corrective Maintenance
Control Panel

7. Is there a take-label sensor board in the old control panel?

Then

Go to See Figure 202. Tip the top of the control panel away from the main
frame and insert the two tabs in the mounting holes in the base. on page 383.

Yes

Continue with Remove the Take-Label Sensor Board.

Remove the Take-Label Sensor Board

1. See Figure 199. Locate the take-label sensor board on the control panel.
2. Remove the mounting screws and then lift the board out of the control panel.
3. Discard the old control panel.

Figure 199 Remove and Install the Take-Label Sensor Board

1
2

13291L-006 Rev. A

Take-label sensor board

Mounting screws (2)

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Control Panel

Install the Take-Label Sensor Board

1. See Figure 200. Align the take-label sensor board with the two guide posts on the new

control panel.
2. Install the sensor board on the posts. Make sure the posts are inserted in the board.

Figure 200 Install the Take-Label Sensor Board

2
3

1
2
3
4

5/4/11

Control panel
Take-label sensor board
Mounting screws (2)
Guide posts (2)

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

381

382

Corrective Maintenance
Control Panel

Figure 201 Install the Take-Label Sensor Board on the Mounting Posts

1
2

Posts (2)
Screw holes (2)

3. See Figure 200 on page 381. Reinstall the two mounting screws.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Control Panel

Install the New Control Panel

1. See Figure 202. Tip the top of the control panel away from the main frame and insert the

two tabs in the mounting holes in the base.

Figure 202 Install the Control Panel in the Base
2

1
4
2
5
1

1
2
3
4
5
6

Base
Control panel
Notch
Tabs (2)
Access holes (2)
Slots (2)

2. See Figure 198 on page 379. Guide the control panel cable through the access hole in the

front of the main frame. Connect the cable to J2 on the MLB.

3. Do you have a take-label sensor?

5/4/11

Then

Continue to step 4.

Yes

a. Guide the take-label sensor cable around and through the lower access hole
in the main frame.
b. Route the take-label sensor cable through the conduit and then connect it to
J19 on the MLB. Continue to step 4.

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

383

384

Corrective Maintenance
Control Panel

4. See Figure 202. Tip the top of the control panel toward the main frame and ensure that the

take-label sensor cable, if installed, is in the notch in the control panel and between the
main frame and the platen roller housing leg.
5. See Figure 198 on page 379. Reinstall the screw and washers to secure the control panel to

the main frame.

Reinstall the Electronics Cover

1. See Figure 197 on page 378. Install the cover by aligning it and sliding down, ensuring the

lower tabs are inside the base and the upper flanges are between the main frame and the
media door.
2. Install the four mounting screws on the back of the printer.
3. See Figure 196 on page 377. Open the media door and install the mounting screw and

washer to secure the electronics cover.

4. Reinstall the media and ribbon.
5. Reconnect the AC power cord and data cables.
6. Turn on (l) the printer.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Main Logic Board

Main Logic Board

This procedure is for installing the main logic board in the S4M printer. Read these
instructions thoroughly before attempting this procedure.

Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Phillips Screwdriver Set

Antistatic Wriststrap and Mat

Standard Nutdriver Set

Remove the Electronics Cover

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1.

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.
2.

Caution While performing any tasks near an open printhead, remove all rings,
watches, hanging necklaces, identification badges, or other metallic objects that could
touch the printhead.

Remove the media and ribbon.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

385

386

Corrective Maintenance
Main Logic Board

3. See Figure 203. Remove the electronics cover mounting screw and washer, and then close

the media door.

Figure 203 Remove the Mounting Screw
1

1
2
3

13291L-006 Rev. A

Media door
Electronics cover upper flange
Electronics cover mounting screw and washer

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Main Logic Board

4. See Figure 204. Remove the four remaining mounting screws securing the electronics

cover.
5. Remove the electronics cover by lifting straight up on the bottom lip of the electronics

cover.
Figure 204 Remove the Electronics Cover
1

1
2

5/4/11

Electronics cover
Mounting screws (4)

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

387

Corrective Maintenance
Main Logic Board

Caution Observe proper electrostatic safety precautions when handling

static-sensitive components such as circuit boards and printheads.

Connect yourself to an antistatic device.

7. See Figure 205. Does your printer have a booster board/ J7 connector on the MLB?

Then

Go to Remove the Old Main Logic Board on page 390.

Yes

Continue with Remove the Booster Board on page 389.

Figure 205 Locate the Booster Board Connector
1

F6
LF 1A

388

1
2

13291L-006 Rev. A

Main logic board

Booster board connector (J7)

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Main Logic Board

Remove the Booster Board

1. See Figure 206. Remove the booster board cable from J7 on the main logic board.
2. Remove and discard the three booster board mounting screws.
3. Remove the booster board from the printer and discard the board.

Figure 206 Remove the Booster Board

1
2
3

Booster board
Booster board mounting screws (3)
Connector J7

4. Continue with Remove the Old Main Logic Board.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

389

Corrective Maintenance
Main Logic Board

Remove the Old Main Logic Board

Caution Observe proper electrostatic safety precautions when handling

static-sensitive components such as circuit boards and printheads.

Connect yourself to an antistatic device.

2. See Figure 205. Does your printer have a booster board/ J7 connector on the MLB?

Then

See Figure 208. Remove all cables from the main logic board.

Yes

See Figure 207. Remove all cables from the main logic board.

Note Take note of the location of all connectors on the main logic board.

Figure 207 Main Logic Board Connectors

(Shown with Booster Board Connector, J7)
1

2
3

13
4

7
8
9

F6
LF 1A

390

12
11

13291L-006 Rev. A

1
2
3
4

Printhead Data (J3)

Power-in (J8)
Control Panel (J2)
Stepper Motor (J9)

8
9
10
11

5
6
7

Booster Board (J7)

Cutter (J13)
Ribbon Sensor/Head Open Sensor
(P4)

12
13

S4M Maintenance Manual

Transmissive Sensor (P9)

Reflective Sensor (P7)
Take-Label Sensor (J19)
Communication Expansion Port
(J17)
USB Port (J14)
Serial Port (J10)

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Main Logic Board

Figure 208 Main Logic Board Connectors

(Shown without Booster Board Connector, J7)
1

2
3

12
4
5
6
11

5/4/11

1
2
3
4

Printhead data (J3)

Power-In (J8)
Front panel (J2)
Stepper motor (J9)

7
8
9
10

5
6

Cutter (J13)
Ribbon sensor, head open sensor
(P4)

11
12

S4M Maintenance Manual

Transmissive sensor (P9)

Reflective sensor (P7)
Take-label sensor (J19)
Communication expansion port
(J17)
USB port (J14)
Serial port (J10)

13291L-006 Rev. A

391

392

Corrective Maintenance
Main Logic Board

3. See Figure 209. Remove the six screws and one nut securing the main logic board to the

frame of the printer.

4. Remove the two studs and washers securing the serial port connector to the back of the

printer.
Figure 209 Remove the Main Logic Board (w/J7 shown)

4
2

3
1
2
3
4
5

Main logic board nut

Main logic board mounting screws (6)
Main logic board (MLB)
Lock washers (2)
Serial port mounting studs (2)

5. Remove the main logic board from the printer.

Install the New Main Logic Board

Caution Observe proper electrostatic safety precautions when handling

static-sensitive components such as circuit boards and printheads.

Connect yourself to an antistatic device.

2. Remove the new main logic board assembly from its packaging.
3. See Figure 209. Install the new main logic board in the printer using the screws, nut, and

studs and washers previously removed.

4. See Figure 208 on page 391. Reconnect all the cables previously removed from the main

logic board. Visually inspect and ensure the cables are in their proper location and seated
in the connectors.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Main Logic Board

Reinstall the Electronics Cover

1. See Figure 204 on page 387. Install the cover by aligning it and sliding down, ensuring the

lower tabs are inside the base and the upper flanges are between the main frame and the
media door.
2. Install the four mounting screws on the back of the printer.
3. See Figure 203 on page 386. Open the media door and install the mounting screw and

washer to secure the electronics cover.

Caution When you are loading media or ribbon, remove all jewelry that could come
into contact with the printhead or other printer parts.

Reinstall the media and ribbon.

5. Reconnect the AC power cord and data cables.
6. Turn on (l) the printer.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

393

394

Corrective Maintenance
Main Logic Board Fuse

Main Logic Board Fuse

This procedure is for installing a replacement main logic board (MLB) fuse in the S4M printer.
Read these instructions thoroughly before performing this procedure.
Caution Turn Off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.
1. Disconnect the AC power cord and data cables.
2.

Caution Observe proper electrostatic safety precautions when handling

static-sensitive components such as circuit boards and printheads.

Connect yourself to an antistatic device.

Remove the Electronics Cover

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1.

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.
2.

Caution While performing any tasks near an open printhead, remove all rings,
watches, hanging necklaces, identification badges, or other metallic objects that could
touch the printhead.

Remove the media and ribbon.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Main Logic Board Fuse

3. See Figure 210. Remove the electronics cover mounting screw and washer, and then close

the media door.

Figure 210 Remove the Mounting Screw
1

2
3

1
2
3
4

5/4/11

Media door
Electronics cover upper flange
Electronics cover mounting screw
Washer

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

395

396

Corrective Maintenance
Main Logic Board Fuse

4. See Figure 211. Remove the four remaining mounting screws securing the electronics

cover.
5. Remove the electronics cover by lifting straight up on the bottom lip of the electronics

cover.
Figure 211 Remove the Electronics Cover

1
2

13291L-006 Rev. A

Electronics cover
Mounting screws (4)

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Main Logic Board Fuse

Remove the Defective Fuse

1. See Figure 212. Using a needle nose pliers, locate and carefully remove the fuse (F6) from

the MLB.
Figure 212 Locate and Remove the MLB Fuse

F6
Fuse 1A 125V

LF 1A

2. Install the new fuse.

Reinstall the Electronics Cover

1. See Figure 30 on page 149. Install the cover by aligning it and sliding down, ensuring the

washer to secure the electronics cover.

4. Reconnect the AC power cord and data cables.
5. Turn on (l) the printer.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

397

398

Corrective Maintenance
Real Time Clock

Real Time Clock

This procedure is for installing the Real Time Clock (RTC) option board in the S4M printer.
Read these instructions thoroughly before performing this procedure.
Caution Turn Off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Phillips Screwdriver Set

Anti-Static Wriststrap and Mat

Needle Nose Pliers

Safety Goggles

Wire Cutters

Remove the Electronics Cover

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1.

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.
2.

Caution While performing any tasks near an open printhead, remove all rings,
watches, hanging necklaces, identification badges, or other metallic objects that could
touch the printhead.

Remove the media and ribbon.

3. See Figure 213. Remove the electronics cover mounting screw and washer, and then close

the media door.

Yes

Go to Remove the RTC Option Board on page 401.

Go to Install the RTC Option Board on page 403.

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Real Time Clock

Remove the RTC Option Board

1. See Figure 215. Locate the RTC option board.

Figure 215 Locate the RTC Option Board

1
2

RTC option board

Main logic board (MLB)

2. Are you installing the RTC option board for the first time?

5/4/11

Then

Yes

Go to Install the RTC Option Board on page 403.

Continue to step 3.

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

401

402

Corrective Maintenance
Real Time Clock

Caution Wear protective eye wear when installing or removing E-rings, C-clips, snap
rings, springs, and mounting buttons. These are under tension and could fly off.

See Figure 216. To remove the standoffs, use long needle nose pliers to pull out the pins in
each of the standoffs and then pull the body of each to remove them from the MLB and the
RTC board.
Figure 216 Remove and Install the Spacers and Standoffs
Open
4

Closed

Pull

8
Standoff

6
7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

RTC option board

Main logic board (MLB)
Standoffs (2)
Pins (2)
Standoff body (2)
Spacers (2)
Locking tabs (2)
Battery
J1 on RTC board

4. Squeeze the spacer locking tab with the needle nose pliers while lifting the board slightly.

Repeat the process on the other spacer to remove the RTC option board.
5. Continue to step 3 of Install the RTC Option Board on page 403.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Real Time Clock

Install the RTC Option Board

Caution Observe proper electrostatic safety precautions when handling

static-sensitive components such as circuit boards and printheads.

Connect yourself to an antistatic device.

2. See Figure 217. First time installation only: Install the plastic spacers into the left two

holes in the MLB.

Figure 217 Install the Spacers
2
1
Install the spacers here.

1
2

Main logic board (MLB)

Spacers (2)

3. See Figure 216 and Figure 218. Install the RTC option board on to the spacers, J1 of the

RTC board facing J5 on the MLB; push down until they lock.
Figure 218 Install the RTC Option Board
1

2
+

5
1
2
3
4
5

5/4/11

Battery
RTC option board
J1 RTC board
J5 MLB
Spacers (2)

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

403

404

Corrective Maintenance
Real Time Clock

4. See Figure 216 on page 402. Ensure the pin is pulled out of the standoff and then insert the

standoff, spring up, through one of the holes on the right side of the RTC board and into
the MLB until it snaps in place.
5. Push the pin in as far as possible to lock the standoff.
6. Repeat step 4 and step 5 for the other standoff.

Reinstall the Electronics Cover

1. See Figure 30 on page 149. Install the cover by aligning it and sliding down, ensuring the

washer to secure the electronics cover.

4. See RRP No. 2 on page 156 and install the electronics cover.
5. Reinstall the media and ribbon.
6. Reconnect AC power cord and data cables.
7. Press and hold CANCEL while turning on (l) the printer.A configuration label prints.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Real Time Clock

8. See Figure 219. Check the configuration label to verify the RTC board was recognized. If

it is not recognized, the circled display will not be visible.

Figure 219 Configuration Label

RTC date and

time visible.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

405

406

Corrective Maintenance
Real Time Clock

Set the RTC

1. See Figure 220. Press MENU, then .

Note To enter the password, press to increase the value, to decrease the value,

to move the curser to the left, and to move the curser to the right.
The factory default password is 1234.
2. Press ENTER; PASSWORD is displayed. The cursor is under the first number.
3. Press or to change the number to the first one of your password and then press to

move the cursor under the next number and change it. Continue until all numbers are
changed to the correct password and then press ENTER.
Figure 220 Control Panel
ALER T

POWER

Cursor

4. Press until RTC DATE is displayed, and then enter the correct date using the same

procedure as you did to enter the password.

5. After the date is correct, press one more time to display the RTC TIME.
6. Change it to the correct time, and then press ENTER.
7. Save the changes.

13291L-006 Rev. A

Press MENU. SAVE CHANGES will be displayed.

Press ENTER. SAVING CHANGES appears until PRINTER READY is displayed.

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Booster Board

Booster Board
This procedure is for installing the booster board into the S4M printer. Read these instructions
thoroughly before performing this procedure.
Caution Turn Off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Caution A qualified service technician must perform this installation.

Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Phillips Screwdriver Set

Anti-Static Wriststrap and Mat

Metric Nutdriver Set

Remove the Electronics Cover

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1.

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.
2.

Caution While performing any tasks near an open printhead, remove all rings,
watches, hanging necklaces, identification badges, or other metallic objects that could
touch the printhead.

Remove the media and ribbon.

3. See Figure 221. Remove the electronics cover mounting screw and washer, and then close

the media door.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

407

408

Corrective Maintenance
Booster Board

Figure 221 Remove the Mounting Screw

2
3

1
2
3
4

Media door
Electronics cover upper flange
Electronics cover mounting screw
Washer

4. See Figure 222. Remove the four remaining mounting screws securing the electronics

cover.
5. Remove the electronics cover by lifting straight up on the bottom lip of the electronics

cover.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Booster Board

Figure 222 Remove the Electronics Cover

1
2

5/4/11

Electronics cover
Mounting screws (4)

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

409

410

Corrective Maintenance
Booster Board

Remove the Booster Board

Caution Observe proper electrostatic safety precautions when handling

static-sensitive components such as circuit boards and printheads.

Connect yourself to an antistatic device.

2. See Figure 223. Remove the booster board cable (J7) from the main logic board.
3. Remove the three booster board mounting screws. Remove the booster board from the

printer.
Figure 223 Remove the Booster Board
3

1
2
3

Booster board
Booster board mounting screws (3)
Connector J7

Install the New Booster Board

1. See Figure 223. Install the new booster board using the three mounting screws provided in

the kit.
2. Connect the booster board cable (J7) to the main logic board.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Booster Board

Reinstall the Electronics Cover

1. See Figure 30 on page 149. Install the cover by aligning it and sliding down, ensuring the

washer to secure the electronics cover.

4. Reinstall the media and ribbon.
5. Reconnect AC power cord and data cables.
6. Turn on (l) the printer.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

411

412

Corrective Maintenance
Power Supply

Power Supply
This procedure is for installing the power supply into the S4M printer. Read these instructions
thoroughly before performing this procedure.

Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Phillips Screwdriver Set

Antistatic Wriststrap and Mat

Metric Nutdriver Set

Remove the Electronics Cover

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Power Supply

2. See Figure 224. Remove the electronics cover mounting screw and washer and then close

the media door.

Figure 224 Remove the Mounting Screw
1

1
2
3
4

5/4/11

Media door
Electronics cover upper flange
Electronics cover mounting screw
Washer

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

413

414

Corrective Maintenance
Power Supply

3. See Figure 225. Remove the four remaining mounting screws securing the electronics

cover.
4. Remove the electronics cover by lifting straight up on the bottom lip of the electronics

cover.
Figure 225 Remove the Electronics Cover

1
2

Electronics cover
Mounting screws (4)

Remove the Power Supply

Caution Observe proper electrostatic safety precautions when handling

static-sensitive components such as circuit boards and printheads.

Connect yourself to an antistatic device.

2. See Figure 226 on page 415 and Figure 227 on page 416. Do you have an early production

S4M with a power supply spacer?

13291L-006 Rev. A

Then

Yes

Continue with Early Production S4M with Spacer.

Go to Later Production S4M without Spacer on page 416.

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Power Supply

Early Production S4M with Spacer

1. See Figure 226. Remove the three power supply mounting screws. Discard the nut and

washer.
Figure 226 Remove the Old Power Supply (early production)

4
3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

5
7

Power supply mounting screw M3 x 0.5 x 6

Power supply mounting screw M4 x 0.7 x 6
Power supply
Power supply mounting nut
Power supply mounting washer
Power supply spacer
Power supply mounting screw M3 x 0.5 x 18

Note Retain the spacer for future reinstallation.

2. Disconnect the two power supply cables and remove the wire harness from the wire clip.
3. Remove the power supply from the printer.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

415

416

Corrective Maintenance
Power Supply

Later Production S4M without Spacer

1. See Figure 227. Remove the three power supply mounting screws.

Note The new power supply has a threaded pem in the lower mounting tab. You do not

need the one washer and mounting nut.

Figure 227 Remove the Old Power Supply (early production)

4
5

1
2
3
4
5

Power supply mounting screw, M3 x 0.5 x 6

Power supply mounting screw, M4 x 0.7 x 6
Power supply
Power supply mounting flat washer, M3
Power supply mounting screw M3 x 0.5 x 18

2. Disconnect the two power supply cables and remove the wire harness out from the wire

clip.
3. Remove the power supply from the printer.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Power Supply

Install the New Power Supply

Early Production S4M with Spacer
1. See Figure 226 on page 415. Place the new power supply into the printer and align it with

the rear mounting hole.

2. Reinstall the rear power supply mounting screw.
3. Reinstall the power supply spacer and align it with the mounting hole in the main frame

and with the mounting tab on bottom of the power supply.

4. Slide the washer onto the bottom mounting screw and then feed it through the mounting

hole and spacer.

5. Tighten the screw into the power supply mounting tab.
6. Reinstall the last power supply mounting screw.
7. Reconnect the two power supply cables and place the wire harness into the wire clip.

Later Production S4M without Spacer

1. See Figure 227 on page 416. Place the new power supply into the printer and align it with

the rear mounting hole.

2. Reinstall the rear power supply mounting screw.
3. Slide the washer onto the bottom mounting screw and then feed it through the mounting

hole.
4. Tighten the screw into the power supply mounting tab.
5. Reinstall the last power supply mounting screw.
6. Reconnect the two power supply cables and place the wire harness into the wire clip.

Reinstall the Electronics Cover

1. See Figure 225 on page 414. Install the cover by aligning it and sliding down, ensuring the

lower tabs are inside the base and the upper flanges are between the main frame and the
media door.
2. Install the four mounting screws on the back of the printer.
3. See Figure 224 on page 413. Open the media door and install the mounting screw and

washer to secure the electronics cover.

4. Reinstall the media and ribbon.
5. Reconnect AC power cord and data cables.
6. Turn on (l) the printer.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

417

418

Corrective Maintenance
Early 10/100 Internal ZebraNet PrintServer, Wireless Print Server Plus, Parallel Port, and No Comm Option

Early 10/100 Internal ZebraNet PrintServer, Wireless

Print Server Plus, Parallel Port, and No Comm Option
This procedure is for installing the 10/100 internal ZebraNet PrintServer, wireless print
server, or parallel port kits into the S4M printer. Read these instructions thoroughly before
performing this procedure.
Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Phillips Screwdriver Set

Antistatic Wriststrap and Mat

Metric Nutdriver Set

Remove the Electronics Cover

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1.

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.
2.

Caution While performing any tasks near an open printhead, remove all rings,
watches, hanging necklaces, identification badges, or other metallic objects that could
touch the printhead.

Remove the media and ribbon.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Early 10/100 Internal ZebraNet PrintServer, Wireless Print Server Plus, Parallel Port, and No Comm Option

3. See Figure 228. Remove the electronics cover mounting screw and washer and then close

the media door.

Figure 228 Remove the Mounting Screw
1

2
3

1
2
3
4

5/4/11

Media door
Electronics cover upper flange
Electronics cover mounting screw
Washer

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

419

420

Corrective Maintenance
Early 10/100 Internal ZebraNet PrintServer, Wireless Print Server Plus, Parallel Port, and No Comm Option

4. See Figure 229. Remove the four remaining mounting screws securing the electronics

cover.
5. Remove the electronics cover by lifting straight up on the bottom lip of the electronics

cover.
Figure 229 Remove the Electronics Cover

1
2

13291L-006 Rev. A

Electronics cover
Mounting screws (4)

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Early 10/100 Internal ZebraNet PrintServer, Wireless Print Server Plus, Parallel Port, and No Comm Option

Remove the Main Logic Board

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1.

Caution Observe proper electrostatic safety precautions when handling

static-sensitive components such as circuit boards and printheads.

Connect yourself to an antistatic device.

2. See Figure 230. Remove all cables from the main logic board.

Note Take note of the location of all connectors on the main logic board.

Figure 230 Remove the Main Logic Board Connections

3
6
11

4
5

10
7

LF 1A

5/4/11

1
2
3
4

Printhead data (J3)

Power-in (J8)
Front panel (J2)
Stepper motor (J9)

7
8
9
10

5
6

Booster board (J7)

Ribbon sensor, head open
(P4)

11
12

S4M Maintenance Manual

Transmissive sensor (P9)

Reflective sensor (P7)
Take-label sensor (J19)
Communication expansion
port (J17)
USB (J14)
Serial port (J10)

13291L-006 Rev. A

421

422

Corrective Maintenance
Early 10/100 Internal ZebraNet PrintServer, Wireless Print Server Plus, Parallel Port, and No Comm Option

3. See Figure 231. Remove the six screws and one nut securing the main logic board to the

frame of the printer.

4. Remove the two studs and washers securing the serial port connector to the back of the

printer.
Figure 231 Remove the Main Logic Board

3
1
2
3
4
5

Main logic board nut (1)

Main logic board mounting screws (6)
Main logic board
Serial port mounting studs (2)
Parallel port mounting screws (2)

5. Remove the main logic board from the printer.

6. Is there a 10/100 internal ZebraNet PrintServer, wireless plus print server, or parallel port

kit already installed on the printer?

13291L-006 Rev. A

Then

Yes

Continue with step 7.

Go to Option Board on page 424.

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Early 10/100 Internal ZebraNet PrintServer, Wireless Print Server Plus, Parallel Port, and No Comm Option

7. Which option board are you removing?

If you are removing a

Then

Early 10/100 Internal

a. See Figure 232. Remove the two screws securing the
ZebraNet PrintServer
PrintServer board or the parallel port connectorto the
board or the parallel port
back of the printer.
b. Remove the standoff and then remove the board from the
printer.
Wireless Plus
Print Server

a. See Figure 233. Remove the two screws securing the

Wireless Plus Print Server to the back of the printer.

b. Remove the two standoffs and mounting screws from the
board and then remove the board from the printer.

Figure 232 Install/Remove the Internal ZebraNet PrintServer Board

or the Parallel Port

2
1
2
3

5/4/11

Standoff
Internal ZebraNet PrintServer board or parallel port
Mounting screws (2)

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

423

424

Corrective Maintenance
Early 10/100 Internal ZebraNet PrintServer, Wireless Print Server Plus, Parallel Port, and No Comm Option

Figure 233 Install/Remove the Wireless Plus Print Server Board

1
3
1

3
2
1
2
3

Standoff
Wireless plus print server board
Mounting screws (2)

Option Board
1. Which option board are you installing?

If you are installing a

Then

Wireless Plus Print Server

Go to Wireless Plus Print Server on page 424.

Parallel Port

Go to Parallel Port Board on page 425.

10/100 Internal ZebraNet Print

Server

Go to Early 10/100 Internal ZebraNet Print

Sever on page 425.

Wireless Plus Print Server

1. See Figure 233 on page 424. Install the wireless plus print server option using the two

standoffs and mounting screws.

2. Install the 40 pin cable that will go to the main logic board.
3. To ensure that the option board firmware matches the MLB firmware, you need to

download firmware. For the latest firmware versions and instructions, go to

http://www.zebra.com/firmware.
Important If the firmware on the option board and the MLB do not match, the option
board may not work.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Early 10/100 Internal ZebraNet PrintServer, Wireless Print Server Plus, Parallel Port, and No Comm Option

Parallel Port Board

1. See Figure 232 on page 423. Install the parallel port option board using the standoff.
2. Install the 40 pin cable that will go to the main logic board.

Early 10/100 Internal ZebraNet Print Sever

1. Are you installing the 10/100 Internal ZebraNet PrintServer for the first time?

Then

Continue with step 2.

Yes

a. See Figure 234. Remove the two short standoffs shown.

b. Remove the two washers, they are used as spacers when there is no option

board installed.
c. Continue with step 2.

Figure 234 Remove the Short Standoffs

1
2
3
4

5/4/11

Washer (must be used when there is no wireless option installed)

Standoff
Standoff
Washer (must be used when there is no option board installed)

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

425

426

Corrective Maintenance
Early 10/100 Internal ZebraNet PrintServer, Wireless Print Server Plus, Parallel Port, and No Comm Option

2. See Figure 232 on page 423. Install the board using the standoff.
3. Install the 40 pin cable that will go to the main logic board.

Reinstall the Main Logic Board

1. See Figure 231 on page 422. Install the main logic board in the printer using the six

screws and one nut removed previously.

2. Reinstall the two screws and washers securing the option board and the two studs and

washers securing the serial port to the back panel.

3. See Figure 230 on page 421. Reinstall all the cables previously removed from the main

logic board. Inspect and ensure the cables are in their proper location and seated in the
connectors.

Reinstall the Electronics Cover

1. See Figure 229 on page 420. Install the cover by aligning it and sliding down, ensuring the

lower tabs are inside the base and the upper flanges are between the main frame and the
media door.
2. Install the four mounting screws on the back of the printer.
3. See Figure 228 on page 419. Open the media door and install the mounting screw and

washer to secure the electronics cover.

Caution When you are loading media or ribbon, remove all jewelry that could come
into contact with the printhead or other printer parts.

Reinstall the media and ribbon.

5. Reconnect AC power cord and data cables.
6. Turn on (l) the printer.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
ZebraNet b/g Print Server

ZebraNet b/g Print Server

This kit includes the parts and documentation necessary to install the ZebraNet b/g Print
Server into the S4M printer. Read these instructions thoroughly before performing this
procedure.

Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Phillips Screwdriver Set

Antistatic Wriststrap and Mat

Metric Nutdriver Set

Remove the Electronics Cover

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1.

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.
2.

Caution While performing any tasks near an open printhead, remove all rings,
watches, hanging necklaces, identification badges, or other metallic objects that could
touch the printhead.

Remove the media and ribbon.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

427

428

Corrective Maintenance
ZebraNet b/g Print Server

3. See Figure 235. Remove the electronics cover mounting screw and washer, and then close

the media door.

Figure 235 Remove the Mounting Screw
1

2
3

1
2
3
4

13291L-006 Rev. A

Media door
Electronics cover upper flange
Electronics cover mounting screw
Washer

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
ZebraNet b/g Print Server

4. See Figure 236. Remove the four remaining mounting screws securing the electronics

cover.
5. Remove the electronics cover by lifting straight up on the bottom lip of the electronics

cover.
Figure 236 Remove the Electronics Cover

1
2

Electronics cover
Mounting screws (4)

Remove the Main Logic Board

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1.

Caution Observe proper electrostatic safety precautions when handling

static-sensitive components such as circuit boards and printheads.

Connect yourself to an antistatic device.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

429

Corrective Maintenance
ZebraNet b/g Print Server

2. See Figure 237. Remove all cables from the main logic board.

Note Take note of the location of all connectors on the main logic board.

Figure 237 Remove the Main Logic Board Connections

2
3

13
4

7
8
9

F6
LF 1A

430

12
11

13291L-006 Rev. A

1
2
3
4

Printhead Data (J3)

Power-in (J8)
Control Panel (J2)
Stepper Motor (J9)

8
9
10
11

5
6
7

Booster Board (J7)

Cutter (J13)
Ribbon Sensor/Head Open Sensor
(P4)

12
13

S4M Maintenance Manual

Transmissive Sensor (P9)

Reflective Sensor (P7)
Take-Label Sensor (J19)
Communication Expansion Port
(J17)
USB Port (J14)
Serial Port (J10)

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
ZebraNet b/g Print Server

3. See Figure 238. Remove the six screws and one nut securing the main logic board to the

frame of the printer.

4. Remove the two studs and washers securing the serial port connector to the back of the

printer.
Figure 238 Remove the Main Logic Board

4
2

3
1
2
3
4
5

Main logic board nut (1)

Main logic board mounting screws (6)
Main logic board
Serial port mounting studs (2)
Parallel port mounting screws (2)

5. Remove the main logic board from the printer.

6. Is there an option board installed?

5/4/11

Then

Go to Install the New ZebraNet b/g Print Server Board on page 436.

Yes

Continue with .Remove the Existing Option Board.

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

431

432

Corrective Maintenance
ZebraNet b/g Print Server

Remove the Existing Option Board

1. Disconnect the 40-pin cable from the option board.
2. Which communication option do you currently have?

If you have a

Then

ZebraNet Internal 10/100 Print

Server Board

Continue with Remove the ZebraNet Internal 10/100

PrintServer Board or the Parallel Option Board.

Parallel Port Option

SEH IPv6 Print Server
ZebraNet Wireless Plus Print
Server

Go to .Remove the Wireless Plus PrintServer Board

on page 433.

ZebraNet Internal Wireless Plus

Print Server

Go to .Remove the Old ZebraNet Internal Plus

PrintServer on page 434.

ZebraNet b/g Print Server

Remove the ZebraNet Internal 10/100 PrintServer Board or the Parallel

Option Board
1. See Figure 239. Remove the standoff and then the 10/100 Print Server, or Parallel Option

Board from the printer.

Figure 239 Remove the 10/100 Print Server Board, Parallel Option Board or
SEH IPV6 Print Server

2
1
2
3

Standoff
ZebraNet Internal 10/100 Print Server board or Parallel Port board
Mounting screws (2)

2. Disconnect the 40-pin cable from the main logic board.

3. Go to Install the New ZebraNet b/g Print Server Board on page 436.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
ZebraNet b/g Print Server

Remove the Wireless Plus PrintServer Board

1. See Figure 240. Remove the two standoffs and mounting screws from the ZebraNet

Wireless Plus Print Server board.

2. Remove the ZebraNet Wireless Plus Print Server board from the printer.

Figure 240 Remove the Wireless Print Server Board

2
1
2
3

Standoffs (2)
ZebraNet Wireless Plus Print Server board
Mounting screws (2)

3. Disconnect the 40-pin cable from the main logic board.

4. Go to Install the New ZebraNet b/g Print Server Board on page 436.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

433

434

Corrective Maintenance
ZebraNet b/g Print Server

Remove the Old ZebraNet Internal Plus PrintServer

1. See Figure 241 or Figure 242. Unscrew the old antenna and remove it from the printer.

Figure 241 Close-up of Antenna Installation

1
2

3
4
5

1
2
3
4
5

13291L-006 Rev. A

Cover
RF connector
Lock washer
Antenna nut
RF antenna

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
ZebraNet b/g Print Server

Figure 242 Close-up of ZebraNet b/g Antenna Installation

1
2

1
2
3
4

Cover
RF connector
Antenna nut
RF antenna

2. See Figure 243. Remove the standoff, the two screws securing the ZebraNet Internal

Wireless Plus Print Server or the ZebraNet b/g Print Server boards, and then remove it.
Figure 243 Remove the ZebraNet Internal Wireless Plus Print Server or the
ZebraNet b/g Print Server Board
3

1
2

3
1
2
3

ZebraNet internal wireless plus print server board

Standoff
Mounting screws (2)

3. Disconnect the 40-pin cable from the main logic board.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

435

436

Corrective Maintenance
ZebraNet b/g Print Server

Install the New ZebraNet b/g Print Server Board

1. See Figure 244. Install the board using the standoff and mounting screws.

Figure 244 Install the New ZebraNet b/g Print Server Board
3

1
2

3
1
2
3

ZebraNet b/g Print Server board

Standoff
Mounting screws (2)

2. Install the 40-pin cable that will go to the main logic board.

Reinstall the Main Logic Board

1. See Figure 238 on page 431. Install the main logic board in the printer using the six

screws and one nut removed previously.

2. From the back panel of the printer, reinstall the two screws and washers securing the

ZebraNet b/g Print Server board and the two studs and washers securing the serial port to
the back panel.
3. See Figure 237 on page 430. Reinstall all the cables previously removed from the main

logic board.
Visually inspect and ensure the cables are in their proper location and seated in the
connectors.

Install the External Antenna

1. See Figure 242 on page 435. To install the external antenna, screw the antenna onto the

RF connector extending out from the back panel of the printer.

The washer and nut (in Figure 242 on page 435) are installed and included with the
assembly in this kit.
2. Using an open-end wrench, tighten the brass nut by turning it clockwise one quarter of a

turn.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
ZebraNet b/g Print Server

Reinstall the Electronics Cover

1. See Figure 236 on page 429. Install the cover by aligning it and sliding down, ensuring the

lower tabs are inside the base and the upper flanges are between the main frame and the
media door.
2. Install the four mounting screws on the back of the printer.
3. See Figure 235 on page 428. Open the media door and install the mounting screw and

washer to secure the electronics cover.

Caution When you are loading media or ribbon, remove all jewelry that could come
into contact with the printhead or other printer parts.

Reinstall the media and ribbon.

5. Reconnect AC power cord and data cables.
6. Turn on (l) the printer.

After You Complete the Installation

Firmware
After you have completed this installation, you must download firmware version
V53.17.11Z (or later) from: www.zebra.com.

Attach Labels
1. See Figure 245. Locate your printer model in the lower right-hand corner of the label.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

437

438

Corrective Maintenance
ZebraNet b/g Print Server

Figure 245 Sample Label

Zebra Technologies Corporation

333 Corporate Woods Parkway

Vernon Hills, IL 60061

Contains Zebra ZLANG-VH Complies With

FCC ID: XXX-ZLANGVH IDA Standards
IC ID: XXXXX-ZLANGVH
XXXXXX
C

C
XXXXXXXX

TRA

REGISTRED No:
XXXXXXX/XX

DEALER No:

CCAF08LP0410T0

XXXXXXX/XX

CMII ID: XXXXXXXXXX

CNC: XXXXXXX
XXXXX-XXX

S4M

1
1
2

13291L-006 Rev. A

Printer model
Zebra part number

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
ZebraNet b/g Print Server

2. See Figure 246. If present, remove the old plastic label affixed inside the media

compartment of your printer.

Note Do not remove the electrical ratings label, also known as the model plate. The

model plate contains essential user information.

Figure 246 Label Location

Zebra Technologies Corporation

333 Corporate Woods Parkway

Vernon Hills, IL 60061

333 Corporate Woods Parkway

Vernon Hills, IL 60061

Contains Zebra ZLANG-VH Complies With

FCC ID: XXX-ZLANGVH IDA Standards
IC ID: XXXXX-ZLANGVH
XXXXXX
C

C
XXXXXXXX

TRA

REGISTRED No:
XXXXXXX/XX

DEALER No:

CCAF08LP0410T0

ZM400
Config. No.
xxxxx-xxxx-xxxxx
Config. No.
xxxxx-xxxx-xxxxx

XXXXXXX/XX

CMII ID: XXXXXXXXXX

CNC: XXXXXXX
XXXXX-XXX

ZM400

1
1
2

Affix label here

Model plate (Do not remove)

3. See Figure 245. Remove the backing from the new label for your specific printer.
4. See Figure 246. Affix the new printer label in the area to the left of the model plate.
5. Discard any additional labels included in the kit.
6. The installation is complete.

Compliance Information
FCC Compliance Statement
This device complies with Part 15 rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause

undesired operation.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

439

440

Corrective Maintenance
ZebraNet b/g Print Server

The user is cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved by Zebra
Technologies Corporation could void the users authority to operate the equipment. To ensure
compliance, this printer must be used with Shielded Communication Cables.

FCC Radiation Exposure Statement

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm
between the radiator and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.

Canadian DOC Compliance Statement

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
ZebraNet b/g Print Server AntennaCommunications

ZebraNet b/g Print Server Antenna

Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Phillips Screwdriver Set

Open End Wrench Set

Installation Instructions
Do you need to install the ZebraNet b/g Print Server PC Board Cover?
If

Then

Yes

Continue with Install the Board Cover.

Go to Install the Antenna on page 442.

Install the Board Cover

1. From the back of the printer, insert the tab on the lower edge of the cover into the slot on

the back plate of the printer.

2. Secure the cover using the screw provided in this kit for your specific printer.
3. Continue with Install the Antenna on page 442.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

441

442

Corrective Maintenance
Installation InstructionsCommunications

Install the Antenna

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

2. See Figure 247. From the back of the printer, place the lock washer and nut on the RF

connector and hand tighten.

Figure 247 Close-up of Antenna Installation
6

1
2

1
2
3
4
5
6

3 4

Cover
RF connector
Lock washer
Nut
Antenna nut
RF antenna

3. Using an open-end wrench, tighten the brass nut by turning it clockwise one quarter of a

turn.
4. To install the external antenna, screw the antenna onto the RF connector extending out

from the back plate of the printer.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Current 10/100 Internal ZebraNet Print Server Option

Current 10/100 Internal ZebraNet Print Server Option

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Phillips Screwdriver Set

Antistatic Wriststrap and Mat

Metric Nutdriver Set

Standard Nutdriver Set

Remove the Electronics Cover

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1.

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.
2.

Caution While performing any tasks near an open printhead, remove all rings,
watches, hanging necklaces, identification badges, or other metallic objects that could
touch the printhead.

Remove the media and ribbon.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

443

444

Corrective Maintenance
Current 10/100 Internal ZebraNet Print Server Option

3. See Figure 248. Remove the electronics cover mounting screw and washer and then close

the media door.

Figure 248 Remove the Mounting Screw
1

2
3

1
2
3
4

13291L-006 Rev. A

Media door
Electronics cover upper flange
Electronics cover mounting screw
Washer

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Current 10/100 Internal ZebraNet Print Server Option

4. See Figure 249. Remove the four remaining mounting screws securing the electronics

cover.
5. Remove the electronics cover by lifting straight up on the bottom lip of the electronics

cover.
Figure 249 Remove the Electronics Cover

1
2

Electronics cover
Mounting screws (4)

Remove the Main Logic Board (MLB)

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1.

Caution Observe proper electrostatic safety precautions when handling

static-sensitive components such as circuit boards and printheads.

Connect yourself to an antistatic device.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

445

Corrective Maintenance
Current 10/100 Internal ZebraNet Print Server Option

2. See Figure 250. Remove all cables from the main logic board.

Note Take note of the location of all connectors on the main logic board.

Figure 250 Remove the Main Logic Board Connections

3
2
4
5

13
6

7
8

F6
LF 1A

446

1
2
3
4

Printhead data (J3)

Power-in (J8)
Control panel (J2)
Stepper motor (J9)

8
9
10
11

Booster board (J7) (only

appears on older MLBs)
Cutter (J13)
Ribbon sensor, head open (P4)

Transmissive sensor (P9)

Reflective sensor (P7)
Take-label sensor (J19)
Communication expansion port
(J17)
USB (J14)

Serial port (J10)

6
7

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Current 10/100 Internal ZebraNet Print Server Option

3. See Figure 251. Remove the six mounting screws and one nut securing the main logic

board to the frame of the printer.

4. Remove the two studs and washers securing the serial port connector to the back of the

printer.
Figure 251 Remove the Main Logic Board

4
2

3
1
2
3
4
5

Main logic board nut (1)

Main logic board mounting screws (6)
Main logic board
Serial port washers (2)
Serial port mounting studs (2)

5. Remove the main logic board from the printer.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

447

448

Corrective Maintenance
Current 10/100 Internal ZebraNet Print Server Option

Remove the Existing Internal 10/100 Print Server

1. See Figure 252. Remove the two outermost mounting screws securing the internal print

server board in the parallel port slot.

2. Remove the standoff and then remove the board from the printer.

Figure 252 Install/Remove the Internal 10/100 Print Server Board

2
1
2
3

Standoff
Internal 10/100 print server board
Mounting screws (2)

Install the New Internal 10/100 Print Sever

1. See Figure 252. To install the print server board, secure the board using the standoff.
2. Reinstall the two outermost mounting screws to secure the internal print server board in

the parallel port slot.

3. Install the 40-pin ribbon cable into the print server at J1.

The other end of this ribbon cable will go to the main logic board.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Current 10/100 Internal ZebraNet Print Server Option

Reinstall the Main Logic Board

1. See Figure 251 on page 447. Install the main logic board in the printer using the six

mounting screws and one nut removed previously.

2. Reinstall the two screws and washers securing the print server board to the back panel.
3. Reinstall the two studs and washers securing the serial port.
4. Install the 40-pin ribbon connector from the print server board to the communication

expansion port, J17, on the main logic board.

5. See Figure 250 on page 446. Reinstall all the cables previously removed from the main

logic board.
Inspect and ensure the cables are in their proper location and seated in the connectors.

Reinstall the Electronics Cover

1. See Figure 249 on page 445. Install the cover by aligning it and sliding down, ensuring the

lower tabs are inside the base and the upper flanges are between the main frame and the
media door.
2. Install the four mounting screws on the back of the printer.
3. See Figure 248 on page 444. Open the media door and install the mounting screw and

washer to secure the electronics cover.

Caution When you are loading media or ribbon, remove all jewelry that could come
into contact with the printhead or other printer parts.

Reinstall the media and ribbon.

5. Reconnect AC power cord and data cables.
6. Turn on (l) the printer.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

449

450

Corrective Maintenance
Current 10/100 Internal ZebraNet Print Server Option

Notes ___________________________________________________________________

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Exterior Components

This section provides replacement and installation procedures for the S4M printers exterior
components.

Contents
Electronics Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Media Door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Media Window Maintenance Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USB Cable Support Bracket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

452
455
458
461

13291L-006 Rev. A

452

Corrective Maintenance
Electronics Cover

Electronics Cover
This procedure is for installing the S4M electronics cover. Read these instructions thoroughly
before performing this procedure.

Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Phillips Screwdriver Set

Metric Nutdriver Set

Remove the Old Electronics Cover

Note Retain all parts removed during disassembly, unless otherwise directed.
1.

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.
2.

Caution While performing any tasks near an open printhead, remove all rings,
watches, hanging necklaces, identification badges, or other metallic objects that could
touch the printhead.

Remove the media and ribbon.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Electronics Cover

3. See Figure 253. Remove the electronics cover mounting screw and washer, and then close

the media door.

Figure 253 Remove the Mounting Screw
1

2
3

1
2
3
4

5/4/11

Media door
Electronics cover upper flange
Electronics cover mounting screw
Washer

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

453

454

Corrective Maintenance
Electronics Cover

4. See Figure 254. Remove the four remaining mounting screws securing the electronics

cover.
5. Remove the electronics cover by lifting straight up on the bottom lip of the electronics

cover.
Figure 254 Remove the Electronics Cover

1
2

Electronics cover
Mounting screws (4)

Install the New Electronics Cover

1. See Figure 254. Install the cover by aligning it and sliding down, ensuring the lower tabs

are inside the base and the upper flanges are between the main frame and the media door.
2. Install the four mounting screws on the back of the printer.
3. See Figure 253 on page 453. Open the media door and install the mounting screw and

washer to secure the electronics cover.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Media Door

Media Door
This procedure is for installing the media door assembly on the S4M printer. Read these
instructions thoroughly before starting this procedure.

Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Metric Nutdriver Set

Remove the Old Media Door

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect the AC power cord and all data cables.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

455

456

Media Door
Media Door

2. See Figure 255. Open the media door and remove and discard the four hinge mounting

screws and washers.

3. Remove the media door.

Figure 255 Remove/Install Media Door

3
2
2
3

1
2
3
4

13291L-006 Rev. A

Media door
Hinges (2)
Washers (4)
Hinge mounting screws (4)

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Media Door
Media Door

Install the New Media Door

1. Install the new door by aligning the front hinge with the two most forward holes.

The front hole is a locating hole; install this screw and washer first and then install the
other three hinge mounting screws and washers.
2. Locate the serial number on the back of yopu printer. Is your serial number 0305490139 or

higher?
If

Then

Yes

Continue to step 3.

a. Peel the backing off of the supplied label.

b. Affix the label to the inside of the new door as shown.
c. Continue to step 3.

Figure 256 Install the Label

Label

TION

CAU

ER
OV CE
TIP
AY OR PLA C E.
FA
RM
TE N ON SUR
A
IS
RIN
E P U LE N TH
O
TH
O
IF Y EMS
IT

3. Reconnect the AC power cord and data cables.

4. Turn on (l) the printer.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

457

458

Corrective Maintenance
Media Window Maintenance Kit

Media Window Maintenance Kit

Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Flat-blade Screwdriver Set

Glass Cleaner

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Open the media door.

2. See Figure 257. Remove the old media door window by using your fingers to press on the

tabs and window.

Once the tab has been popped out of the door, keep outward pressure on the window to
keep the tab from popping back in.
Figure 257 Remove the Old Window
A

3
4

B
A
B
1
2
3
4

Flexible tabs (7)

Non-flexible tabs (3)
First tab to press
Second set of tabs to press
Third set of tabs to press
Fourth set of tabs to press

3. Lift the old window out of the door and discard it.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
Media Window Maintenance Kit

4. See Figure 258 and Figure 259. Hold the new window with top away from the

windowless door and set the non-flexible tabs over the door edge.
Figure 258 Align the New Window
1 2

3
1
2
3

5/4/11

New window
Door edge
Non-flexible tabs (3)

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

459

460

Corrective Maintenance
Media Window Maintenance Kit

Figure 259 Position Non-Flexible Tab

1
2

Non-flexible tab
Inside door edge

5. See Figure 258 on page 459. Lift and press the window into place until all flexible tabs

have snapped in place and the window is secure.

6. Clean the new window.
7. Reconnect the AC power cord and data cables.
8. Turn on (l) the printer

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
USB Cable Support Bracket

USB Cable Support Bracket

This kit includes the parts and documentation necessary to install the USB Cable Support Bracket
on the S4M printer.
Read these instructions thoroughly before installing this kit.

Tools Required
Tools You need these tools to complete this procedure:

Phillips Screwdriver Set

Wire Cutters

Are you installing the USB cable only?

Then

Yes

Go to Install the USB Cable on page 464.

Continue with Install the USB Support Bracket.

Install the USB Support Bracket

Caution Turn off (O) the printer and disconnect it from the power source before
performing the following procedure.

Turn off (O) the printer and remove the AC power cord and all data cables.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

461

462

Corrective Maintenance
USB Cable Support Bracket

2. See Figure 260. Remove the center mounting screw securing the electronics cover.

Figure 260 Remove the Mounting Screws

1
4

1
2
3
4

Option board or cover plate

Electronics cover
Center electronics cover mounting screw
Bottom option board or cover plate mounting screw

3. Remove the bottom mounting screw securing the option board or cover plate.
4. Remove the USB cable support bracket from the kit.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
USB Cable Support Bracket

5. See Figure 261. Align the USB cable support bracket with the two mounting holes and

then install the two mounting screws removed previously to secure it.
Figure 261 Install the USB Cable Support Bracket
1

1
2
3
4

5/4/11

USB cable support bracket

Printer mounting holes (2)
USB support bracket mounting holes (2)
Mounting screws (2)

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

463

464

Corrective Maintenance
USB Cable Support Bracket

Install the USB Cable

1. Ensure the printer is turned off (O).
2. Install the USB cable into the connector.
3. Install two cable ties as shown to secure the USB cable.

Figure 262 Install the USB Cable and Two Cable Ties
1

1
2
3

USB cable
Cable ties (2)
USB cable support bracket

4. Reinstall the AC power cord and data cables if removed.

5. Turn on (l) the printer.

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Corrective Maintenance
USB Cable Support Bracket

Notes ___________________________________________________________________

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

465

466

Corrective Maintenance
USB Cable Support Bracket

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

5
Maintenance and Drawings

This section illustrates parts and assemblies common to the S4M and gives their maintenance
part numbers.
Use the mechanical assembly drawings in this section when troubleshooting or replacing
components and use the associated parts list when ordering replacement parts. Item parts that
do not have associated part numbers are not available and need to be ordered using the next
highest assembly number.

Contents
Media Side Main Printer Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronics Side Main Printer Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Mechanism/Printhead Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printhead Maintenance Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printhead Cable Maintenance Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Platen Drive System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Latch Assembly Maintenance Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Platen Roller Maintenance Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(Reflective) Media Sensor Assembly Maintenance Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ribbon/Printhead Open Sensor Assembly Maintenance Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmissive Sensor Assembly Maintenance Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dancer Assembly Maintenance Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ribbon Supply Spindle Maintenance Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Static Brush Maintenance Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ribbon Take-up Spindle Maintenance Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Media Hanger Maintenance Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Media Door Maintenance Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peel Option Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peel Assembly Maintenance Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pinch Roller Maintenance Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronics Cover Maintenance Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Panel and Take-Label Maintenance Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stepper Motor Maintenance Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Logic Board Maintenance Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Real Time Clock (RTC) Maintenance/Option Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

470
473
475
476
477
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498

13291L-006 Rev. A

468

Maintenance and Drawings

Contents

Contents (Continued)
Booster Board Maintenance Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Maintenance Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ribbon Take-up Spindle Clutch Maintenance Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gears and Pulley Maintenance Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cutter Option/Maintenance Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware View 1 (Media Compartment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware View 2 (Printer Rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware View 3 (Printer Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware View 4 (Electronics Side). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

499
500
501
502
504
505
506
507
508
510

5/4/11

Maintenance and Drawings

Contents

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

469

470

Maintenance and Drawings

Contents

Figure A Media Side Main Printer Assemblies

1
2

4
5

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Maintenance and Drawings

Contents

Table A Media Side Main Printer Assemblies

Item

Part Number

G20070M

20053

G20069M

G77085M

G77302M

2004M

G20067-104M
G20067-106M

77238M

G77767M

G77752M

20038
20039

G20060M

Description

Qty

Media Door Assembly Maintenance Kit (see Table Q on page 490)

Lower Rear Cover
Media Hanger Assembly Maintenance Kit ( see Table P on page 489)
Ribbon Supply Spindle Maintenance Kit (see Table M on page 486)
Static Brush Assembly Maintenance Kit (see Table N on page 487)
Ribbon Take-up Spindle Maintenance Kit (see Table O on page 488)
203 dpi Print Mechanism Maintenance Kit (see Table D on page 476)
300 dpi Print Mechanism Maintenance Kit (see Table D on page 476)
Dancer Assembly (see Table L on page 485)
Ribbon/Head Open Assembly Maintenance Kit (see Table J on page 483)
Transmissive Sensor Maintenance Kit (see Table K on page 484)
Lower Front Cover, Tear
Lower Front Cover, Peel
Control Panel Assembly Maintenance Kit (see Table V on page 495)

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Bold = Part available for purchase

Light italic = Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

471

472

Maintenance and Drawings

Contents

Figure B Electronics Side Main Printer Assemblies

2
3

7
8

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Maintenance and Drawings

Electronics Side Main Printer Assemblies

Table B Electronics Side Main Printer Assemblies

Item

Part Number

20071M

HW77123

20001M

20002M

20006
20005

20008M

20100M
20101M

28420-001M

Description

Qty

Electronics Cover (see Table U on page 494)

Washer, 0.379 0.53 0.056 (sold in quantities of 25)
Ribbon Take-up Spindle Clutch Maintenance Kit (see Table AB
on page 501)
Compound Gear
Intermediate Gear
Compound Pulley
Belt, 0.080P 139T, 203 dpi
Belt, 0.080P 128T, 300 dpi
Stepper Motor and Gear/Pulley (see Table W on page 496)
Main Logic Board Maintenance Kit (4 MB) (see Table X on page 497)
Main Logic Board Maintenance Kit (64 MB) (see Table X on page 497)
Booster Board Maintenance Kit (see Table Z on page 499)

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Bold = Part available for purchase

Light italic = Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

473

474

Maintenance and Drawings

Electronics Side Main Printer Assemblies

Figure C Print Mechanism/Printhead Assembly

7
9
6
8

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Maintenance and Drawings

Print Mechanism/Printhead Assembly

Table C Print Mechanism/Printhead Assembly

Item

Part Number

HW77047

77172M

77660

N/A

HW10473

HWQ10011

41400M
41401M

77173

HW77043

77049-104

HW79041

N/S

20106M

Description

Qty

Thumbscrew, M3 0.5 (sold in quantities of 5)

Pressure Dial Maintenance Kit
Magnetic Latch
Strike Plate Cap
Flat Washer, M4 (part of 77112M) (sold in quantities of 25)
Screw, M4 0.7 10 (part of 77112M) (sold in quantities of 100)
Printhead Kit 203 dpi Maintenance Kit (see Table D on page 476)
Printhead Kit 300 dpi Maintenance Kit (see Table D on page 476)
Lower Printhead Guide
Screw, M3 0.5 6 (sold in quantities of 25)
Ribbon Strip Plate
Washer, 0.250 0.125 0.023 (sold in quantities of 25)
Printhead Cable Maintenance Kit (see Table E on page 477)

1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1

1
2
1

N/S = Not Shown

Bold = Part available for purchase
Light italic = Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

475

476

Maintenance and Drawings

Printhead Maintenance Kit

Figure D Printhead Maintenance Kit

Table D Printhead Maintenance Kit

Item

Part Number

41400M

41401M

Description

Printhead Kit 203 dpi Maintenance Kit

Printhead Kit 300 dpi Maintenance Kit

Qty

1
1

Bold=Part available for purchase

Light italic=Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Maintenance and Drawings

Printhead Cable Maintenance Kit

Figure E Printhead Cable Maintenance Kit

Table E Printhead Cable Maintenance Kit

Item
1
2
3

Part Number
20106M

Description

Printhead Cable Maintenance Kit

HWQ06020 Cable Tie, 0.09 3.62 (sold in quantities of 20)
HWQ10011 Screw, M4 0.7 10 (sold in quantities of 100)

Qty

1
1
1

Bold=Part available for purchase

Light italic=Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

477

478

Maintenance and Drawings

Printhead Cable Maintenance Kit

Figure F Platen Drive System

1
2

5
3

4
8

10
8

7
11

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Maintenance and Drawings

Platen Drive System

Table F Platen Drive System

Item
1

Part Number

Description

Qty

Transmissive Sensor Maintenance Kit (see Table K on page 484)

Outer Media Guide Maintenance Kit
G20043M
HW46128 Washer, Flat Nylon 0.37 0.19 0.05 (sold in quantities of 25)
Media Sensor Assembly Maintenance Kit (see Table I on page 482)
G77807M
Platen Roller Maintenance Kit (see Table H on page 481)
G77023M
Ribbon/Open sensor Maintenance Kit (see Table J on page 483)
G77767M
Screw, M4 0.700 10 mm (sold in quantities of 5)
HW78814

78811

Flat Washer, 0.500 0.195 0.090 (sold in quantities of 25)

77625M

1
2
1

2
3
4
5
6

G77752M

HW77231

Peel Tear Bar Maintenance Kit

Screw, M3 8 mm (sold in quantities of 25)

77112M

Print Mechanism Latch Maintenance Kit (see Table G on page 480)

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Bold=Part available for purchase

Light italic=Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

479

480

Maintenance and Drawings

Latch Assembly Maintenance Kit

Figure G Latch Assembly Maintenance Kit

4
5

Table G Latch Assembly Maintenance Kit

Item
1
2
3
4
5
6

Part Number

Description

Latch Maintenance Kit

Strike Plate Cap
N/A
HW10473 Flat Washer, M4 (sold in quantities of 25)
HWQ10011 Screw, M4 0.7 10 (sold in quantities of 100)
Latch Plate Cover
N/A
HW77043 Screw, M3 0.5 6 mm (sold in quantities of 25)

77112M

Qty

1
1
1
1
2
1

Bold = Part available for purchase

Light italic = Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Maintenance and Drawings

Platen Roller Maintenance Kit

Figure H Platen Roller Maintenance Kit

Table H Platen Roller Maintenance Kit

Item
1

Part Number
77023M

Description

Platen Roller Maintenance Kit

Qty

Bold = Part available for purchase

Light italic = Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

481

482

Maintenance and Drawings

(Reflective) Media Sensor Assembly Maintenance Kit

Figure I (Reflective) Media Sensor Assembly Maintenance Kit

Table I (Reflective) Media Sensor Assembly Maintenance Kit

Item
1

Part Number

Description

Reflective Media Sensor Assembly Maintenance Kit

HWQ06020 Cable Tie, 0.090 3.630 (sold in quantities of 25)

77807M

Qty

1
3

Bold = Part available for purchase

Light italic = Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Maintenance and Drawings

Ribbon/Printhead Open Sensor Assembly Maintenance Kit

Figure J Ribbon/Printhead Open Sensor Assembly Maintenance Kit

Table J Ribbon/Printhead Open Sensor Assembly Maintenance Kit

Item
1
2

Part Number
77767M

Description

Ribbon/Printhead Open Sensor Assembly Maintenance Kit

HW77237 Screw, M3 0.70 10 mm (sold in quantities of 5)

Qty

1
1

Bold = Part available for purchase

Light italic = Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

483

484

Maintenance and Drawings

Transmissive Sensor Assembly Maintenance Kit

Figure K Transmissive Sensor Assembly Maintenance Kit

Table K Transmissive Sensor Assembly Maintenance Kit

Item
1

Part Number

Description

Transmissive Sensor Assembly Maintenance Kit

HW44216 Screw, M4.2 x 1.14 x 13 (sold in quantities of 25)
HWQ06020 Cable Tie, 0.09 x 3.62 (sold in quantities of 25)

77752M

2
3

Qty

1
1
2

Bold = Part available for purchase

Light italic = Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Maintenance and Drawings

Dancer Assembly Maintenance Kit

Figure L Media Handling System

3
1

Table L Dancer Assembly Maintenance Kit

Item
1
2

Part Number
77238M

Description

Dancer Assembly Maintenance Kit

HW06313 E-ring External 0.375 (sold in quantities of 25)

Qty

1
1

Bold = Part available for purchase

Light italic = Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

485

486

Maintenance and Drawings

Ribbon Supply Spindle Maintenance Kit

Figure M Ribbon Supply Spindle Maintenance Kit

2 3

Table M Ribbon Supply Spindle Maintenance Kit

Item
1
2
3
4

Part Number
G77085M
HW10432
HW33807
HW33808

Description

Ribbon Supply Spindle Maintenance Kit

Screw, M4 x 0.7 12 Cap (sold in quantities of 25)
Washer, 0.198 x 0.75 x 0.085 (sold in quantities of 25)
Washer, 0.500 x 0.377 x 0.020 (sold in quantities of 25)

Qty

1
1
1
1

Bold = Part available for purchase

Light italic = Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Maintenance and Drawings

Static Brush Maintenance Kit

Figure N Static Brush Maintenance Kit

Table N Static Brush Maintenance Kit

Item
1
2

Part Number
G77302M

Description

Static Brush Maintenance Kit

HW77237 Screw, M3 0.70 10 mm (sold in quantities of 5)

Qty

1
2

Bold =Part available for purchase

Light italic = Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

487

488

Maintenance and Drawings

Ribbon Take-up Spindle Maintenance Kit

Figure O Ribbon Take-up Spindle Maintenance Kit

Table O Ribbon Take-up Spindle Maintenance Kit

Item
1

Part Number
20004M

Description

Ribbon Take-up Assembly Maintenance Kit

Qty

Bold =Part available for purchase

Light italic = Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Maintenance and Drawings

Media Hanger Maintenance Kit

Figure P Media Hanger Maintenance Kit

Table P Media Hanger Maintenance Kit

Item
1

Part Number
20069M

Description

Media Hanger Maintenance Kit

Qty

Bold =Part available for purchase

Light italic = Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

489

490

Maintenance and Drawings

Media Door Maintenance Kit

Figure Q Media Door Maintenance Kit

Table Q Media Door Maintenance Kit

Item
1

Part Number
G20070M

2
3

Description

Media Door Maintenance Kit

HW77237 Screw, M4 0.7 10 (sold in quantities of 5)
HW43482 External Lock Washer, 4 mm

Qty

1
4
4

Bold =Part available for purchase

Light italic = Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Maintenance and Drawings

Peel Option Kit

Figure R Peel Option Kit

Table R Peel Option Kit

Item
1
2
3

Part Number
G20046

Description

Peel Option Kit

HW77231 Screw, M3 8 mm Flanged (sold in quantities of 25)
20065M Tale-Label Maintenance/Option Kit

Qty

1
2
1

Bold =Part available for purchase

Light italic = Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

491

492

Maintenance and Drawings

Peel Assembly Maintenance Kit

Figure S Peel Assembly Maintenance Kit

Table S Peel Assembly Maintenance Kit

Item
1

Part Number
G78002M

Description

Peel Assembly Maintenance Kit

HW77231 Screw, M3 8 mm Flanged (sold in quantities of 25)

Qty

1
2

Bold =Part available for purchase

Light italic = Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Maintenance and Drawings

Pinch Roller Maintenance Kit

Figure T Pinch Roller Maintenance Kit

Table T Pinch Roller Maintenance Kit

Item
1
2

Part Number
77197M

Description

Qty

Pinch Roller Maintenance Kit

HW10094 E-ring 3 mm (two extra supplied) (sold in quantities of 25)

1
4

Bold =Part available for purchase

Light italic = Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

493

494

Maintenance and Drawings

Electronics Cover Maintenance Kit

Figure U Electronics Cover Maintenance Kit

3
4

Table U Electronics Cover Maintenance Kit

Item
1

Part Number
20071M

2
3
4

Description

S4M Electronics Cover Maintenance Kit

HW43495 Screw, M3 0.5 6, w/External Lock Washer
(sold in quantities of 25)
HW43482 Lock Washer, External, 4 mm (sold in quantities of 25)
HW77237 Screw, M4 0.7 10 (sold in quantities of 5)

Qty

1
1
1
4

Bold =Part available for purchase

Light italic = Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Maintenance and Drawings

Control Panel and Take-Label Maintenance Kits

Figure V Control Panel and Take-Label Maintenance Kits

Table V Control Panel and Take-Label Maintenance Kits

Item

Part Number

G20060M

20065M

Description

Control Panel Maintenance Kit

Take-Label Maintenance/Option Kit

Qty

1
1

Bold = Part available for purchase

Light italic = Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

495

496

Maintenance and Drawings

Stepper Motor Maintenance Kit

Figure W Stepper Motor Maintenance Kit

Table W Stepper Motor Maintenance Kit

Item
1

Part Number
20008M

2
3
4

Description

Stepper Motor and Gear/Pulley Maintenance Kit

HW77239 Adjustment Nut (sold in quantities of 25)
HW10432 Screw, M4 0.7 12 (sold in quantities of 25)
HW44924 Screw, M3 0.5 8 (sold in quantities of 25)

Qty

1
1
1
1

Bold = Part available for purchase

Light italic = Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Maintenance and Drawings

Main Logic Board Maintenance Kit

Figure X Main Logic Board Maintenance Kit

Table X Main Logic Board Maintenance Kit

Item
1

Part Number
P1008211
P1008212

Description

Main Logic Board Maintenance Kit (4 Meg)

Main Logic Board Assembly Kit (64 Meg)

Qty

1
1

Bold = Part available for purchase

Light italic = Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

497

498

Maintenance and Drawings

Real Time Clock (RTC) Maintenance/Option Kit

Figure Y Real Time Clock (RTC) Option/Maintenance Kit

Table Y Real Time Clock (RTC) Maintenance/Option Kit

Item
1

Part Number
G20009M

Description

RTC Option/Maintenance Kit

Qty

Bold = Part available for purchase

Light italic = Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Maintenance and Drawings

Booster Board Maintenance Kit

Figure Z Booster Board Maintenance Kit

Table Z Booster Board Maintenance Kit

Item
1
2

Part Number

Description

Booster Board Maintenance Kit

HW78803 Screw, M3 0.5 0.4 (sold in quantities of 50)

G28420-001M

Qty

1
3

Bold = Part available for purchase

Light italic = Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

499

500

Maintenance and Drawings

Power Supply Maintenance Kit

Figure AA Power Supply Maintenance Kit

Table AA Power Supply Maintenance Kit

Item
1

Part Number
G29600M

Description

Power Supply Maintenance kit

Qty

Bold = Part available for purchase

Light italic = Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Maintenance and Drawings

Ribbon Take-up Spindle Clutch Maintenance Kit

Figure AB Ribbon Take-up Clutch Maintenance Kit

Table AB Ribbon Take-up Spindle Clutch Maintenance Kit

Item
1

Part Number
G20001M

Description

Ribbon Take-up Spindle Clutch Maintenance Kit

Qty

Bold = Part available for purchase

Light italic = Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

501

502

Maintenance and Drawings

Gears and Pulley Maintenance Kit

Figure AC Gears and Pulley Maintenance Kit

Table AC Gears and Pulley Maintenance Kit

Item
1

Part Number
20002M

Description

Gears and Pulley Maintenance Kit

Qty

Bold = Part available for purchase

Light italic = Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Maintenance and Drawings

Gears and Pulley Maintenance Kit

Figure AD Print Server Option Kit

5
6
7

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

503

504

Maintenance and Drawings

Wireless PCMCIA Board Maintenance/Option Kit

Table AD Communication Options

Item
1

Part Number
G20063M
P1031033

G20037M

29882-001M

P1032272

P1032276

P1000221

P1000219

Description

10/100 Print Server Option Maintenance Kit IPv4

10/100 R2 Print Server Option Maintenance Kit
Parallel Port Option Maintenance Kit
Wireless Plus Print Server Maintenance Kit
ZebraNet b/g Wireless PrintServer
(contact your Zebra representative for availability)
Wireless Print Server Antenna Maintenance Kit
SEH PS102-Z Internal IPv6 PrintServer
SEH PS102-Z External IPv6 PrintServer

Qty

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Bold = Part available for purchase

Light italic = Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Maintenance and Drawings

10/100 and Parallel Port Maintenance/Option Kits

Figure AE Cutter Option

2
3

Table AE Cutter Option/Maintenance Kit

Item
1

Part Number
P1008213

P1008214

HW43894

77041

HW07808

Description

Cutter Option/Maintenance Kit

Cutter Cover Maintenance Kit
Screw, M4 0.7 10 (sold in quantities of 25)
Cutter Catch Tray
Cable Clamp, Flat, 1 in. 1 in. (sold in quantities of 25)

Qty

1
1
1
1
1

Bold = Part available for purchase

Light italic = Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

505

506

Maintenance and Drawings

Hardware View 1 (Media Compartment)

Figure AF Hardware View 1 (Media Compartment)

2
4
4

2
6

Table AF Hardware View 1 (Media Compartment)

Item

Part Number

HW44114

HW78814

HW43482

HW78801

HW10473

HW77078

Description

Screw, M4.2 8 (sold in quantities of 50)

Screw, M4 0.7 10 (sold in quantities of 5)
External Lock Washer, 4 mm (sold in quantities of 25)
Flat Washer, 0.438 0.188 0.049 (sold in quantities of 25)
Flat Washer M4 (sold in quantities of 25)
Flat Washer, 0.500 0.195 0.090 (sold in quantities of 25)

Qty

6
20
5
4
2
5

Bold = Part available for purchase

Light italic = Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Maintenance and Drawings

Hardware View 2 (Printer Rear)

Figure AG Hardware View 2 (Printer Rear)

1
2

3 & 4

Table AG Hardware View 2 (Printer Rear)

Item

Part Number

HW77237

HW43495

HW01155

HW22416

Description

Screw, M4 0.7 10 (sold in quantities of 5)

Screw w/external lock washer, M3 0.5 6
(sold in quantities of 25)
Lock Washer (sold in quantities of 100)
Standoff, 4-40 (sold in quantities of 25)

Qty

5
7
2
2

Bold = Part available for purchase

Light italic = Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

507

508

Maintenance and Drawings

Hardware View 3 (Printer Front)

Figure AH Hardware View 3 (Printer Front)

1
2

2
2

Table AH Hardware View 3 (Printer Front)

Item

Part Number

HW77043

HW77231

Description

Screw, M3 0.5 6 (sold in quantities of 25)

Screw, M3 8

Qty

2
4

Bold = Part available for purchase

Light italic = Part not available for purchase, listed and shown for reference only

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Maintenance and Drawings

Hardware View 3 (Printer Front)

Figure AI Hardware View 4 (Electronics Side)

4 & 5

2 & 7

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

509

510

Maintenance and Drawings

Hardware View 4 (Electronics Side)

Table AI Hardware View 4 (Electronics Side)

Item

Part Number

HW78803

HW10460

HW10423

HW77239

HW10432

HW78814

HW10412

HW44924

HW44356

Description

Screw, M3 0.5 4 (sold in quantities of 50)

Nut, M3 2.4 5.5 (sold in quantities of 25)
Screw, M4 0.7 6
Adjustment Nut (sold in quantities of 25)
Screw, M4 0.7 12 (sold in quantities of 25)
Screw, M4 0.7 10 (sold in quantities of 5)
Screw, M3 0.5 18 (sold in quantities of 10)
Screw, M3 0.5 8 (sold in quantities of 25)
Washer, 0.198 0.75 0.085

5/4/11

Glossary

media supply hanger The stationary arm that supports the media roll.
non-continuous media Media that contains an indication of where one label/printed
format ends and the next one begins. Examples are die-cut labels, notched tag-stock, and stock
with black mark registration marks.
non-volatile memory Electronic memory that retains data even when the power to the
printer is turned off.
notched media A type of tag stock containing a cutout area that can be sensed as a start-oflabel indicator by the printer. This is typically a heavier, cardboard-like material that is either
cut or torn away from the next tag. (See non-continuous media.)
peel-off A mode of operation in which the printer peels a printed label away from the
backing and allows the user to remove it before another label is printed. Printing pauses until
the label is removed.
print speed The speed at which printing occurs. For thermal transfer printers, this speed is
expressed in terms of ips (inches per second).
printhead wear The degradation of the surface of the printhead and/or the print elements
over time. Heat and abrasion can cause printhead wear. Therefore, to maximize the life of the
printhead, use the lowest print darkness setting (sometimes called burn temperature or head
temperature) and the lowest printhead pressure necessary to produce good print quality. In the
thermal transfer printing method, use ribbon that is as wide or wider than the media to protect
the printhead from the rough media surface.
registration Alignment of printing with respect to the top (vertical) or sides (horizontal) of a
label or tag.
roll media Media that comes supplied rolled onto a core (usually cardboard). Contrast this
with fanfold media.
supplies A general term for media and ribbon.
symbology The term generally used when referring to a bar code.
tag A type of media having no adhesive backing but featuring a hole or notch by which the
tag can be hung on something. Tags are usually made of cardboard or other durable material.
tear-off A mode of operation in which the user tears the label or tag stock away from the
remaining media by hand.
thermal transfer A printing method in which the printhead presses an ink or resin coated
ribbon against the media. Heating the printhead elements causes the ink or resin to transfer
onto the media. By selectively heating the printhead elements as the media and ribbon move
past, an image is printed onto the media. Contrast this with direct thermal.

5/4/11

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

513

514

Glossary

Notes ___________________________________________________________________

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Index

active control panel buttons, 32

adjustments
label left side, 79
label top, 79
LCD darkness, 99
print speed, 81
print width, 81
printhead pressure, 68
reflective sensor, 66
tear-off position, 79, 97
agency approvals, 47
ALERT light, 34
antenna replacement
ZebraNet b/g Print Server, 441
APL-D
set Module A storage device, 83
set Module B storage device, 84
setting compatibility mode, 81
setting control codes, 82
APL-I
adjust label left position, 79
print settings, 83, 95
print stored format, 84
print stored page, 84
set printer resolution, 82
status response, 85
arrow button functions, 33
auto calibration, 65

bar codes
darkness comparison during FEED self test, 130
list, 83, 95
specifications, 51
baud rate, 84
before you begin setup, 37
black mark media
specifying, 80, 98
booster board
parts list, 499
replacement, 407

5/4/11

C
calibration
media and ribbon sensors, 90, 100
setting for head close, 93
setting for media power up, 93
troubleshooting problems, 122
Canadian DOC compliance, 440
CANCEL button
CANCEL self test, 128
function, 32
CANCEL light, 34
changing display language, 77
changing dpi through printhead upgrade, 164
checklist
before you begin, 37
troubleshooting, 113

S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

516

Index

cleaning
exterior of printer, 143
media compartment and sensors, 146
peel-off assembly, 147
printhead and platen roller, 144
recommended cleaning schedule, 143
command character, 86
communication interfaces, 42
communications diagnostics test
overview, 133
selecting hex dump mode, 87
communications problems, 123
components of printer, 35
configuration
changing password-protected parameters, 71
viewing printer settings, 74
configuration label
printing from control panel, 74
printing using CANCEL self test, 128
connect printer to computer or network, 42
connect printer to power source, 40
Contacts, 27
continuous media
described, 44
specifying, 80, 98
control character, 86
control panel
buttons, 32
LCD error messages, 114
LCD functions, 32
lights, 34
location, 30
overview, 31
parameters described, 78
parts list, 495
replacement, 376
Customer service, 27

D
dancer assembly
parts list, 485
replacement, 347
darkness adjustment, 78, 97
data bits, 85
data cables, 43
data ports, 103

13291L-006 Rev. A

data source
communication interfaces, 103
connections, 42
site selection, 39
DB-9 to DB-25 connection, 106
default values
passwords, 71
reset network parameters, 88
resetting, 88, 101
sensor selection, 80, 98
defragmenting message, 117
delimiter character, 86
density (darkness) adjustment, 78
diagnostics, 127
direct thermal mode
media scratch test, 45
setting through control panel, 88
display language
changing from unreadable language, 125
selection, 77
download firmware, 36
dpi change through printhead upgrade, 164
drive system
changing dpi, 164

E
electronics cover, 30
parts list, 494
removing, 154
replacement, 452
electronics side
hardware parts list, 510
parts list, 473
emulations, 36
ENTER button function, 32
enter Setup mode, 70
EPL parameters
density (darkness), 78
KDU mode, 81
equipment safety tips, 139
error messages, 114
Error mode, 32
Ethernet
characteristics of internal wired connection, 43
characteristics of wireless connection, 43
external view of printer, 30

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Index

F
factory defaults, 88, 101
FCC compliance, 439
FCC radiation exposure limits, 440
FEED button
FEED and PAUSE self test, 132
FEED self test, 130
function, 33
FEED light, 34
firmware, 36
Flash memory initialization, 88
font list, 83, 95
formats list, 83, 95

G
gap/notch, 80, 98
gears and pulley
parts list, 502
general specifications, 46

label sensor positioning, 66

label top
position adjustment, 79
printer cannot detect, 126
labels did not print, 123
language
changing from unreadable language, 125
language selection
available languages, 91
procedure, 77
latch assembly
parts list, 480
LCD darkness adjustment, 99
LCD messages
error messages, 114
leave Setup mode, 70
left side adjustment, 79
Liability, 2
load factory defaults, 88, 101
load media, 56
load ribbon, 60

H
handshaking protocol, 85
hardware control signal descriptions, 104
hardware parts list
electronics side, 510
media compartment, 506
printer front, 508
printer rear, 507
HEAD COLD message
cycling with other messages, 115
displayed alone, 116
displaying alone, 116
HEAD ELEMENT BAD message, 115
HEAD TOO HOT message, 116
hex dump mode, 87
host handshake, 85
humidity requirements, 39

I
images list, 83, 95
initialize Flash memory, 88
international safety organization marks, 41

K
KDU mode, 81

L
label length setting, 82, 99
label removal method, 80, 98

5/4/11

M
main logic board
fuse replacement, 394
parts list, 497
replacement, 385
replacement procedure, 385
manual calibration, 65
manufacturing menu parameters, 94
Media
ordering, 27
media
continuous roll media, 44
loading, 56
non-continuous roll media, 44
RFID smart labels, 44
specifications, 49
specify type, 80, 98
types of media, 44
media compartment
cleaning, 146
components, 35
hardware parts list, 506
media door, 30
parts list, 490
replacement, 455
media hanger
parts list, 489
replacement, 270
media power up setting, 93
media scratch test, 45
S4M Maintenance Manual

13291L-006 Rev. A

517

518

Index

media sensor
calibrate, 90, 100
parts list
reflective sensor, 482
transmissive sensor, 484
reflective sensor adjustment, 66
replacement
reflective, 241
transmissive, 226
select sensor type, 80, 98
sensor profile, 89, 96
transmissive sensor location, 66
MENU button function, 32
modem connection, 107

N
navigation through parameters, 70
network configuration label, 74
network parameter defaults, 88
No Comm option, 418, 443
non-continuous media
described, 44
specifying, 80, 98

O
operating conditions, 39
Operating mode, 32
Ordering ribbon and media, 27
outer media guide
parts list, 479
replacement, 351
override ZPL commands, 89

P
parallel port
cabling requirements, 108
characteristics of parallel connection, 42
pin configuration, 108
replacement, 418, 443
setting parallel communications, 84
settings, 108
parity, 85

13291L-006 Rev. A

parts list
booster board, 499
control panel, 495
dancer assembly, 485
electronics cover, 494
electronics side, 473
gears and pulley maintenance kit, 502
hardware
electronics side, 510
media compartment, 506
printer front, 508
printer rear, 507
latch assembly, 480
main logic board, 497
media door, 490
media hanger, 489
outer media guide, 479
peel assembly, 492
Peel option, 491
pinch roller, 493
platen drive system, 479
platen roller, 481
power supply, 500
printhead, 476
printhead assembly/print mechanism, 475
printhead cable, 477
Real-Time Clock (RTC), 498
reflective sensor, 482
ribbon supply spindle, 486
ribbon take-up spindle, 488
ribbon take-up spindle clutch, 501
ribbon/printhead open sensor, 483
static brush, 487
stepper motor, 496
transmissive sensor, 484
wireless PCMCIA board, 504
password
defaults, 71
level 1 and 2 parameters, 78
level 3 parameters, 82
level 4 parameters, 91
PAUSE button
FEED and PAUSE self test, 132
function, 33
PAUSE self test, 128
PAUSE light, 34
Pause mode, 32
Peel-Off mode
cleaning peel-off assembly, 147
selecting label removal method, 80

S4M Maintenance Manual

522

Index

Notes ___________________________________________________________________

13291L-006 Rev. A

S4M Maintenance Manual

5/4/11

Zebra Technologies Corporation

Zebra Technologies Corporation
475 Half Day Road, Suite 500
Lincolnshire, IL 60069 USA
T: +1 847 634 6700
Toll-free +1 866 230 9494
F: +1 847 913 8766
Zebra Technologies Europe Limited
Dukes Meadow
Millboard Road
Bourne End
Buckinghamshire, SL8 5XF, UK
T: +44 (0)1628 556000
F: +44 (0)1628 556001
Zebra Technologies Asia Pacific, LLC
120 Robinson Road
#06-01 Parakou Building
Singapore 068913
T: +65 6858 0722
F: +65 6885 0838
http://www.zebra.com

2011 ZIH Corp.

Printed on
chlorine-free
recycled paper.

13291L-006 Rev. A

Manual Servicio MX C303W - MX C304W
No ratings yet
Manual Servicio MX C303W - MX C304W
429 pages
DPS5020 Operating Manual
No ratings yet
DPS5020 Operating Manual
9 pages
1333415-zxp 7 Series
No ratings yet
1333415-zxp 7 Series
384 pages
Xi4 Maintenance Manual
100% (9)
Xi4 Maintenance Manual
826 pages
8401 Atmos Cube Operating-Manual en V 1.0
No ratings yet
8401 Atmos Cube Operating-Manual en V 1.0
49 pages
530S - IO - SVT Lenovo IdeaPad 530S-15IKB - EYG10 IO r1.0
No ratings yet
530S - IO - SVT Lenovo IdeaPad 530S-15IKB - EYG10 IO r1.0
6 pages
Lexmark Printer Parts Guide
No ratings yet
Lexmark Printer Parts Guide
69 pages
Kyocera 5150 Service Manual
No ratings yet
Kyocera 5150 Service Manual
213 pages
SM Accuriopress c2060l
No ratings yet
SM Accuriopress c2060l
41 pages
Manual Zebra Zm400
No ratings yet
Manual Zebra Zm400
147 pages
m651 m680 Troubleshooting Manual
No ratings yet
m651 m680 Troubleshooting Manual
568 pages
S4M Service Manual
100% (1)
S4M Service Manual
522 pages
Sharp MX-M283 N
100% (2)
Sharp MX-M283 N
513 pages
ServiceManualOKI C610 - ES6410 PDF
No ratings yet
ServiceManualOKI C610 - ES6410 PDF
217 pages
FS 1030MFP 1035MFP 1130MFP 1135mfpenog
No ratings yet
FS 1030MFP 1035MFP 1130MFP 1135mfpenog
442 pages
B721 B731 MPS5501b Maintenance Manual Rev 1
100% (1)
B721 B731 MPS5501b Maintenance Manual Rev 1
230 pages
KIP 7000 Printer Service Guide
No ratings yet
KIP 7000 Printer Service Guide
506 pages
IPF710 Service Mode
No ratings yet
IPF710 Service Mode
23 pages
Konica Minolta QMS 2060 Pagework20 Service Manual
No ratings yet
Konica Minolta QMS 2060 Pagework20 Service Manual
87 pages
LU-202 Nov2016
No ratings yet
LU-202 Nov2016
43 pages
FS-1020D Service Manual Guide
No ratings yet
FS-1020D Service Manual Guide
132 pages
SM MX B427W S4e
No ratings yet
SM MX B427W S4e
292 pages
Scanner Brother Service Manual
No ratings yet
Scanner Brother Service Manual
159 pages
SHARP AR-M256 AR-M257 AR-M258 AR-M316 AR-M317 AR-M318 AR-5625 AR-5631 Service Manual Pages
No ratings yet
SHARP AR-M256 AR-M257 AR-M258 AR-M316 AR-M317 AR-M318 AR-5625 AR-5631 Service Manual Pages
3 pages
HP Latex R Site Preparation Guide
No ratings yet
HP Latex R Site Preparation Guide
36 pages
PC - v06 Parts Manual Savin 907ex
100% (3)
PC - v06 Parts Manual Savin 907ex
332 pages
Service Manual - Acer Aspire 1400 Series
No ratings yet
Service Manual - Acer Aspire 1400 Series
114 pages
Epson Printer Error Codes Guide
No ratings yet
Epson Printer Error Codes Guide
39 pages
User's Guide: Read This Guide First
No ratings yet
User's Guide: Read This Guide First
96 pages
Cummins 4196 Gris
No ratings yet
Cummins 4196 Gris
51 pages
Ipf Troubleshooting Guide
100% (2)
Ipf Troubleshooting Guide
173 pages
Manuel Technique DP 771 4
No ratings yet
Manuel Technique DP 771 4
117 pages
Dell H815dw S2815dn Diag
No ratings yet
Dell H815dw S2815dn Diag
80 pages
Service Manual: EPSON FX-890/2190
No ratings yet
Service Manual: EPSON FX-890/2190
129 pages
OKI ES5162 - Maintenance Manual
No ratings yet
OKI ES5162 - Maintenance Manual
226 pages
Lexmark Cs720 Cs725 Cs727 Cs728 c4150 SM
No ratings yet
Lexmark Cs720 Cs725 Cs727 Cs728 c4150 SM
548 pages
User Guide 605
100% (1)
User Guide 605
46 pages
Installation Manual for E-1 Machine
No ratings yet
Installation Manual for E-1 Machine
18 pages
Kendall Avi 6060 Av Impulse Service Manual
No ratings yet
Kendall Avi 6060 Av Impulse Service Manual
43 pages
G7836CD Operating Instructions
100% (1)
G7836CD Operating Instructions
64 pages
HP Printer Firmware Downgrade Guide
No ratings yet
HP Printer Firmware Downgrade Guide
4 pages
MP 402 Operation Panel Service - Final - 010916
No ratings yet
MP 402 Operation Panel Service - Final - 010916
64 pages
Sharp MX b382 MX b402
0% (1)
Sharp MX b382 MX b402
308 pages
Digital B&W Copier (D159-NA) Parts Catalog
No ratings yet
Digital B&W Copier (D159-NA) Parts Catalog
128 pages
Riso RP Series Handbook Manual
No ratings yet
Riso RP Series Handbook Manual
171 pages
Manual-1515674466-Sh marLED E9 E15 10 en 01 K
No ratings yet
Manual-1515674466-Sh marLED E9 E15 10 en 01 K
28 pages
Manual Epson Gts50 Ed 1
No ratings yet
Manual Epson Gts50 Ed 1
6 pages
CW-C4000Series SM Eng Reva
No ratings yet
CW-C4000Series SM Eng Reva
510 pages
Epson Perfection 3200 Photo Service Manual
No ratings yet
Epson Perfection 3200 Photo Service Manual
78 pages
S6 Service Manual
No ratings yet
S6 Service Manual
117 pages
Pantum M6200 M6500 Series Service Manual
No ratings yet
Pantum M6200 M6500 Series Service Manual
108 pages
Latitude-D800 Service Manual En-Us
No ratings yet
Latitude-D800 Service Manual En-Us
48 pages
Zebra ZM400-ZM600 Maint Man
No ratings yet
Zebra ZM400-ZM600 Maint Man
470 pages
Zm400 Zm600 Maintenance Manual
No ratings yet
Zm400 Zm600 Maintenance Manual
117 pages
ZM400 ZM600 Service Manual 14207L-004
No ratings yet
ZM400 ZM600 Service Manual 14207L-004
580 pages
UG S4M - Manual PDF
No ratings yet
UG S4M - Manual PDF
150 pages
Manual Zebra
No ratings yet
Manual Zebra
132 pages
Manual de Instruções ZEBRA ZM400
No ratings yet
Manual de Instruções ZEBRA ZM400
147 pages
Xerox 7755
No ratings yet
Xerox 7755
256 pages
ZT400 Series
No ratings yet
ZT400 Series
234 pages
Zebra ZE500™: User Guide
No ratings yet
Zebra ZE500™: User Guide
170 pages
DELL 5210n, 5310n Parts List, Service Manual
No ratings yet
DELL 5210n, 5310n Parts List, Service Manual
430 pages
Parts Catalog
No ratings yet
Parts Catalog
98 pages
DCP - L8400DCN Parts List
No ratings yet
DCP - L8400DCN Parts List
45 pages
LEXMARK X651de Series Service Manual
No ratings yet
LEXMARK X651de Series Service Manual
594 pages
Maintenance: This Chapter Includes
No ratings yet
Maintenance: This Chapter Includes
42 pages
CV Mfc8370n Ukeng Usr Ls7729004 A
No ratings yet
CV Mfc8370n Ukeng Usr Ls7729004 A
10 pages
Phaser 6500 and WorkCentre 6505 Security Firmware Internal Release Notes
No ratings yet
Phaser 6500 and WorkCentre 6505 Security Firmware Internal Release Notes
8 pages
6P14P
No ratings yet
6P14P
5 pages
Ricoh Priport JP5000
No ratings yet
Ricoh Priport JP5000
465 pages
Brother DCP8070D Error Codes
No ratings yet
Brother DCP8070D Error Codes
2 pages
Brother DCP8070D Error Codes
No ratings yet
Brother DCP8070D Error Codes
2 pages
RDBMS - SQL
No ratings yet
RDBMS - SQL
30 pages
SBI 7126T S6 Blade Module
No ratings yet
SBI 7126T S6 Blade Module
74 pages
Overview History R
No ratings yet
Overview History R
15 pages
Microsoft AZ-204 Exam Demo Guide
No ratings yet
Microsoft AZ-204 Exam Demo Guide
12 pages
Annihilator Method
100% (1)
Annihilator Method
7 pages
Chapter 2 Linear Signal Models
No ratings yet
Chapter 2 Linear Signal Models
40 pages
LCR Measurements
No ratings yet
LCR Measurements
16 pages
3842 PDF
No ratings yet
3842 PDF
8 pages
Jwt-Auth: Pacote: Tymon/Jwt-Auth Github: Documentação: 1. Instalar O Pacote
No ratings yet
Jwt-Auth: Pacote: Tymon/Jwt-Auth Github: Documentação: 1. Instalar O Pacote
3 pages
PMP Certification: PMBOK® 6.0
No ratings yet
PMP Certification: PMBOK® 6.0
11 pages
DSP LAB Manual - ECE - KNCET
No ratings yet
DSP LAB Manual - ECE - KNCET
60 pages
19 B9 IELTS T2 Essays 240 T2 Questions
100% (1)
19 B9 IELTS T2 Essays 240 T2 Questions
116 pages
Conducting Cambridge IGCSE ICT (0417) Practical Test Instructions
No ratings yet
Conducting Cambridge IGCSE ICT (0417) Practical Test Instructions
5 pages
Masterclass Conclusion
No ratings yet
Masterclass Conclusion
12 pages
Hi-Target V30 50 GNSS RTK System Manual PDF
100% (2)
Hi-Target V30 50 GNSS RTK System Manual PDF
70 pages
Latest - IFTA International Schedule of Definitions (V2018)
No ratings yet
Latest - IFTA International Schedule of Definitions (V2018)
9 pages
Polymorphism Assignment
No ratings yet
Polymorphism Assignment
5 pages
FRST
No ratings yet
FRST
19 pages
Weatherwax - Conte - Solution - Manual Capitulo 2 y 3
No ratings yet
Weatherwax - Conte - Solution - Manual Capitulo 2 y 3
59 pages
Factsheet Ric290 2018-08 en Web
No ratings yet
Factsheet Ric290 2018-08 en Web
2 pages
Perbandingan Biaya Jaringan Dan Kelayakan Teknologi LTE Pada Frekuensi 900 MHZ, 1800 MHZ, 2100 MHZ, Dan 2300 MHZ Untuk Mendukung Rencana Pita Lebar Di Indonesia
No ratings yet
Perbandingan Biaya Jaringan Dan Kelayakan Teknologi LTE Pada Frekuensi 900 MHZ, 1800 MHZ, 2100 MHZ, Dan 2300 MHZ Untuk Mendukung Rencana Pita Lebar Di Indonesia
16 pages
2013 SNUG SV Synthesizable SystemVerilog Paper
No ratings yet
2013 SNUG SV Synthesizable SystemVerilog Paper
45 pages
Maintenance Manual mb491 PDF
No ratings yet
Maintenance Manual mb491 PDF
298 pages
IQAN-MD4 Instructionbook UK
No ratings yet
IQAN-MD4 Instructionbook UK
45 pages
Normalisasi Database
No ratings yet
Normalisasi Database
25 pages
Adventures in Data Analysis: A Systematic Review of Deep Learning Techniques For Pattern Recognition in Cyber Physical Social Systems
No ratings yet
Adventures in Data Analysis: A Systematic Review of Deep Learning Techniques For Pattern Recognition in Cyber Physical Social Systems
65 pages
EEE363.2 Mid SU2020 Pineapple
No ratings yet
EEE363.2 Mid SU2020 Pineapple
2 pages
GE3151 - Python
No ratings yet
GE3151 - Python
2 pages
Rest-Assured Rest
No ratings yet
Rest-Assured Rest
17 pages